You are on page 1of 536

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

RSR10
68P02909W07-A

2008 Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no
liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained
herein. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability,
function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content
hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability
arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or
information about Motorola products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced
in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce
such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This document, Motorola products, and 3rd Party Software products described in this document may include
or describe copyrighted Motorola and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola, its licensors, and
other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right
to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly,
any copyrighted material of Motorola, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the
Motorola products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed,
merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase
of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola or other 3rd Party supplied software,
except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a
product.
A list of 3rd Party supplied software copyrights are contained in the Supplemental information section of this
document.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part
of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission
of Motorola, Inc.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc and its licensors. It is furnished by express
license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
High Risk Materials
Components, units, or 3rd Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT
designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication
Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Motorola and its supplier(s)
specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
Trademarks

Motorola and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners.

The CE mark confirms Motorola, Inc. statement of compliance with EU directives applicable to this product. Copies
of the Declaration of Compliance and installation information in accordance with the requirements of EN50385 can
be obtained from the local Motorola representative or by contacting the Customer Network Resolution Center
(CNRC). The 24 hour telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the
internet, contact the Local Motorola Office.

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Table
of
Contents

Contents

BSC Initial Configuration Guide


.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
11
11
11
11

Definition of BSC Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version information . . . . . . . .
Resolution of Service Requests . .
Incorporation of Change Notices. .
General information . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross references . . . . . . . . . .
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting Motorola . . . . . . . . . .
24hour support . . . . . . . . . .
Questions and comments . . . . .
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security advice. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings, cautions, and notes . . . . .
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General safety . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic energy . . . . . .
Caring for the environment . . . . . .
In EU countries . . . . . . . . . .
In non-EU countries . . . . . . . .
CMM labeling and disclosure table . .
Motorola document set . . . . . . . .
Ordering documents and CD-ROMs
Document banner definitions . . .
Data encryption . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Chapter 1: Definition of BSC Initial Configuration

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration


Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Separated . . . . . .
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated) . . . . . . . . . .
A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP
Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Mode on
. . . . . . . . . . . .

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
the A
. . . .

.
.
.
.
.

2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3

. .

2-5

.
.
.
.
.

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Contents

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Combined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined, Built-in PCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A
Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Configuration Scenario: IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSC Global Data (IP on A Interface, Built-in PCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (IP Transmission Mode on the A
Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

2-7
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-12

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

2-14
2-16
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21

. .
. .

2-24
2-25

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)


Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure the BSC Devices (BM/TC Separated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a GBSR Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a BSC Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Power Distribution Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC EAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Subrack Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Links (BM/TC Separated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Links on the Ater Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Links on the A Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface) .
Configuring the BSC Clock (BM/TC Separated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-2
3-3
3-3
3-5
3-11
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-21
3-23
3-71
3-73
3-84
3-84
3-93
3-100
3-114
3-126
3-126
3-129
3-131
3-134
3-136
3-137

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-2
4-3
4-3
4-5
4-11
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-17
4-20
4-62
4-64
4-72

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)


Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined). . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined)
Configuring the BSC Attributes . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points . . . . . .
Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Devices (BM/TC Combined) . .
Adding a GBSR Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a GEPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Power Distribution Box . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Boards . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC EAC . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Subrack Communication Link . .
Configuring the BSC Links (BM/TC Combined) . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

ii

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Contents

Configuring Links on the A Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface) .
Configuring the BSC Clock (BM/TC Combined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-72
4-78
4-92
4-104
4-104
4-107
4-109
4-111

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)


Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Global Data (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the M3UA Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Devices (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a GBSR Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a GEPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Power Distribution Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC EAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Subrack Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the BSC Links (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Links on the A Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface) .
Configuring the BSC Clock (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-2
5-3
5-3
5-5
5-12
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-18
5-21
5-69
5-71
5-79
5-79
5-86
5-100
5-112
5-112
5-114
5-115

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS


.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

6-2
6-3
6-3
6-17
6-32
6-32
6-35

Reference to BSC Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (BM/TC Separated) . . .
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (BM/TC Separated).
Subrack Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semipermanent Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ater Connection Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ater Signaling Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ater OML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Interface E1/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS7 Signaling Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS7 Signaling Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-8
7-9

Configuring the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Adding a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a HorizonMacro BTS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Optional BTS Attributes . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Site Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

iii

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7-9
7-9
7-11
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-15
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-18
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-23
7-23
7-23
7-24
7-26
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-29
7-29
7-31
7-34
7-34
7-34
7-35
7-37
7-39
7-39
7-41
7-43
7-46
7-51
7-52
7-53

Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial Configuration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


01 (2008-07-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2
8-2

Gb Interface Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links on the A and Ater Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timeslots on the Ater Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (BM/TC Separated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GMPS/GEPS Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GTCS Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration principles of BSC clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (BM/TC Combined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (BM/TC Combined) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrack Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semipermanent Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Interface E1/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS7 Signaling Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS7 Signaling Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gb Interface Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (BM/TC Combined). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GMPS/GEPS Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration principles of BSC clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) . . .
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) .
Subrack Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semipermanent Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gb Interface Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface). . . . .
GMPS/GEPS Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration principles of BSC clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the Built-in PCU Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the Gb Interface Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Cells and Neighbor Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neighbor Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Principles of the FH Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRXs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timeslots on the Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timeslot Arrangement on the Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Multiplexing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semipermanent Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles of Idle Timeslot Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8: Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial Configuration Guide

iv

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

List
of
Figures

List of Figures

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

3-1: Configure BSC Attributes dialog box. . . . . . . .


3-2: Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (1) . . .
3-3: Add OPC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4: Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (2) . . .
3-5: Add DPC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6: Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (3) . . .
3-7: Add STP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8: Configure Subrack-OSP Mapping dialog box. . . .
3-9: Add Cabinet dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10: Add Subrack dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11: Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box . . . . .
3-12: Add Subrack dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13: Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box . . . . .
3-14: Add Power Distribution Box dialog box . . . . . .
3-15: Configure Power Distribution Box dialog box . . .
3-16: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(1)
3-18: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(2)
3-19: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(3)
3-20: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . .
3-22: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . .
3-23: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . .
3-24: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2) . . . .
3-25: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . .
3-26: Add Board dialog box-GDPUX . . . . . . . . . .
3-27: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GDPUX . .
3-28: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-DSP TC . .
3-29: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . .
3-31: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GOIUA . .
3-33: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-sub-board
3-34: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port . . .
3-35: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-APS. . . .
3-36: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEIUT . .
3-38: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port . . .
3-39: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . .
3-41: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2) . . . .
3-42: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEPUG . .
3-44: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port . . .
3-45: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-5
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-12
3-14
3-16
3-17
3-19
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-40
3-41
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-61
v

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

List of Figures

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

3-46: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUG . . . . . . . .


3-47: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port . . . . .
3-48: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos . . . . . . . . . .
3-49: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection
3-50: Configure Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51: Add Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52: Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53: Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54: Configure BSC Router dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55: Add BSC Router dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-56: Add BSC EAC dialog box-switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57: Add BSC EAC dialog box-analog and alarm threshold . . . .
3-58: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
3-59: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
3-60: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
3-61: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
3-62: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
3-63: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
3-64: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
3-65: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
3-66: Configuring the Ater connection path . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-67: Adding an Ater connection path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-68: Configuring the Ater OML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-69: Adding an Ater OML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-70: Configuring the Ater signaling link . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-71: Adding an Ater signaling link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-72: Configure A Interface E1/T1 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
3-73: Adding an A interface E1/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-74: Configure SS7 Signaling Link dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
3-75: Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-76: Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-77: Configure NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-78: Add NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-79: Configure BC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-80: Add BC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-81: Configure SGSN Clock dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-82: Configure NSVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-83: Add NSVC dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-84: Configure PTBBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85: Add PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-86: Configure NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87: Add NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-88: Configure Local NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-89: Add Local NSVL dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-90: Configure Remote NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-91: Add Remote NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-92: Configure PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93: Add PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-94: Configuring the clock on line 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-95: Configuring the clock on line 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-96: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . . .
3-97: Configuring the clock on line 0 for the GMPS . . . . . . . .
3-98: Configuring the clock on line 1 for the GMPS . . . . . . . .
3-99: Configure System Clock dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-100: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . .
3-101: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . .
4-1: Configure BSC Attributes dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2: Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

vi

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-62
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-72
3-73
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
3-82
3-83
3-86
3-87
3-89
3-90
3-92
3-93
3-95
3-96
3-98
3-99
3-100
3-102
3-103
3-105
3-106
3-108
3-110
3-111
3-113
3-114
3-116
3-117
3-119
3-120
3-121
3-122
3-124
3-125
3-128
3-129
3-130
3-132
3-133
3-135
3-137
3-139
4-5
4-7

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

4-3: Add OPC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


4-4: Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (2) . . . . . . . . .
4-5: Add DPC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6: Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (3) . . . . . . . . .
4-7: Add STP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8: Configure Subrack-OSP Mapping dialog box. . . . . . . . . .
4-9: Add Cabinet dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10: Add Subrack dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11: Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12: Add Power Distribution Box dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13: Configure Power Distribution Box dialog box . . . . . . . . .
4-14: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(1) . . . . . .
4-16: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM (2) . . . . . .
4-17: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(3) . . . . . .
4-18: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
4-21: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2) . . . . . . . . . .
4-22: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
4-23: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24: Add Board dialog box-GDPUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GDPUX . . . . . . . .
4-26: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-DSP TC . . . . . . . .
4-27: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GOIUA . . . . . . . .
4-31: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-sub-board . . . . . .
4-32: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port . . . . . . . . .
4-33: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-APS. . . . . . . . . .
4-34: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
4-36: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2) . . . . . . . . . .
4-37: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEPUG . . . . . . . .
4-39: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port . . . . . . . . .
4-40: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUG . . . . . . . .
4-42: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port . . . . .
4-43: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos . . . . . . . . . .
4-44: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection
4-45: Configure Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46: Add Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47: Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-48: Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-49: Configure BSC Router dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50: Add BSC Router dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-51: Add BSC EAC dialog box-switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-52: Add BSC EAC dialog box-analog and alarm threshold . . . .
4-53: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
4-54: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
4-55: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
4-56: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
4-57: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
4-58: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
4-59: Configure A Interface E1/T1 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
4-60: Adding an A interface E1/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Figures

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-17
4-19
4-20
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-37
4-38
4-40
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-54
4-55
4-55
4-56
4-57
4-58
4-58
4-59
4-60
4-61
4-61
4-63
4-64
4-66
4-67
4-68
4-69
4-70
4-71
4-73
4-74

vii

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

List of Figures

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

4-61: Configure SS7 Signaling Link dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .


4-62: Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-63: Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64: Configure NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65: Add NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-66: Configure BC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-67: Add BC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68: Configure SGSN Clock dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-69: Configure NSVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-70: Add NSVC dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-71: Configure PTBBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-72: Add PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73: Configure NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74: Add NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-75: Configure Local NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-76: Add Local NSVL dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77: Configure Remote NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-78: Add Remote NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-79: Configure PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-80: Add PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-81: Configuring the clock on line 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-82: Configuring the clock on line 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-83: Configure System Clock dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-84: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . . .
4-85: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . . .
5-1: Configure BSC Attributes dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2: Configure M3UA Entity dialog box-local entity . . . . . . . .
5-3: Add M3UA Local Entity dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4: Configure M3UA Entity dialog box-destination entity . . . . .
5-5: Add M3UA Destination Entity dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6: Configure M3UA Entity dialog box-signaling transfer entity . .
5-7: Add M3UA Transfer Entity dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8: Configure Subrack-OPC Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . .
5-9: Add Cabinet dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10: Add Subrack dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11: Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12: Add Power Distribution Box dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13: Configure Power Distribution Box dialog box . . . . . . . . .
5-14: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(1) . . . . . .
5-16: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(2) . . . . . .
5-17: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(3) . . . . . .
5-18: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
5-21: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2) . . . . . . . . . .
5-22: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
5-23: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24: Add Board dialog box-GDPUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GDPUX . . . . . . . .
5-26: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-DSP TC . . . . . . . .
5-27: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28: Configure Board Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUA . . . . . . . .
5-31: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port . . . . .
5-32: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos . . . . . . . . . .
5-33: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

viii

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-76
4-77
4-78
4-80
4-81
4-83
4-84
4-86
4-88
4-89
4-91
4-92
4-94
4-95
4-97
4-98
4-99
4-100
4-102
4-103
4-106
4-107
4-109
4-111
4-113
5-5
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-13
5-15
5-17
5-18
5-20
5-21
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-34
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-40
5-41
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-46

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

5-34: Configure Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5-35: Add Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36: Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37: Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-38: Configure BSC Router dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-39: Add Board Router dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-40: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . .
5-42: Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2) . . . . . . . . . .
5-43: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-44: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEPUG . . . . . . . .
5-45: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port . . . . . . . . .
5-46: Add Board dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-47: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUG . . . . . . . .
5-48: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port . . . . .
5-49: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos . . . . . . . . . .
5-50: Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection
5-51: Configure Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-52: Add Device IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-53: Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-54: Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-55: Configure BSC Router dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-56: Add BSC Router dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-57: Add BSC EAC dialog box-switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-58: Add BSC EAC dialog box-analog and alarm threshold . . . .
5-59: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
5-60: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
5-61: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
5-62: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
5-63: Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . .
5-64: Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box . . . . . . . .
5-65: Configure M3UA Linkset dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-66: Add M3UA Link Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-67: Configure M3UA Link dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-68: Add M3UA Link dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-69: Configure M3UA Route dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-70: Add M3UA Route dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-71: Configure NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-72: Add NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-73: Configure BC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-74: Add BC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-75: Configure SGSN Clock dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-76: Configure NSVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-77: Add NSVC dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-78: Configure PTBBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-79: Add PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-80: Configure NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-81: Add NSE dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-82: Configure Local NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-83: Add Local NSVL dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-84: Configure Remote NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-85: Add Remote NSVL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-86: Configure PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-87: Add PTPBVC dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-88: Configure System Clock dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-89: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . . .
5-90: Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box . . . . . . .
6-1: Add Site dialog box (1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Figures

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-47
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-61
5-62
5-62
5-63
5-64
5-65
5-65
5-66
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-70
5-71
5-73
5-74
5-75
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-80
5-81
5-83
5-84
5-85
5-86
5-88
5-89
5-91
5-92
5-94
5-96
5-97
5-99
5-100
5-102
5-103
5-105
5-106
5-107
5-108
5-110
5-111
5-113
5-115
5-117
6-5

ix

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

List of Figures

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

6-2: Add New Site dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


6-3: Add Site dialog box (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4: Add Site dialog box (3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5: Adding a cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6: Add Site dialog box (4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7: Add Site dialog box (5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8: Site Device Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
6-9: Binding Logical TRX dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10: Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box 1 . . . . .
6-11: Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box 2 . . . . .
6-12: Add Site dialog box (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13: Set Cell Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14: Add Site dialog box (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15: Add New Site dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16: Add Site dialog box (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17: Add Site dialog box (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18: Adding a cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19: Add Site dialog box (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20: Add Site dialog box (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21: Site Device Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
6-22: Binding Logical TRX dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
6-23: Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box (1) . . . .
6-24: Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box (2) . . . .
6-25: Add Site dialog box (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26: Set Cell Attributes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27: Add or Delete Site Chain dialog box (1) . . . . . .
6-28: Add and Delete Site Chain dialog box (2) . . . . . .
6-29: Add Site Slave Chain dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
6-30: Add 2G External Cell dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
6-31: Configure 2G external cell Attributes. . . . . . . .
6-32: Add 3G External Cell dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
6-33: Configure 3G External Cell Attributes dialog box. .
6-34: Configuring Adjacent Cells dialog box (1) . . . . .
6-35: Configuring Adjacent Cells dialog box (2) . . . . .
6-36: Configuring relations between adjacent cells. . . .
7-1: Links on the A and Ater interfaces (GTCS configured
7-2: Links on the A and Ater interfaces (GTCS configured
7-3: Connections of configuration objects . . . . . . . .
7-4: Configuring TRX attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5: Star topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6: Chain topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7: Tree topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8: Ring topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9: Multiple BTS multiplexing modes . . . . . . . . . .
7-10: BTSs in tree topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
on the BSC side)
on the MSC side)
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

6-6
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-37
6-38
6-40
6-41
6-43
6-44
6-45
7-10
7-11
7-32
7-37
7-39
7-40
7-40
7-41
7-46
7-49

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

List
of
Tables

List of Tables

Table 2-1: Scenarios of BSC initial configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Table 2-2: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes . . . . .
Table 2-3: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP and DSP . .
Table 2-4: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-5: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the subrack-OSP
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-6: Signaling code negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-7: CGI negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-8: Signaling link data negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-9: Optical interface board attribute negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-10: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG
attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-11: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the device IP address . .
Table 2-12: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the port IP address . .
Table 2-13: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSC router . . . .
Table 2-14: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-15: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-16: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-17: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-18: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-19: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-20: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-21: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-22: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes . . . .
Table 2-23: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP and
DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-24: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP . . . . . . . .
Table 2-25: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the subrack-OSP
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-26: Signaling code negotiated for interconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-27: CGI negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-28: Signaling link data negotiated for interconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-29: Optical interface board attribute negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-30: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG
attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-31: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the device IP address . .
Table 2-32: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the port IP address . .
68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

2-2
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-17
2-17
2-17
xi

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

List of Tables

Table 2-33: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSC router . . . .
Table 2-34: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-35: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-36: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-37: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-38: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-39: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-40: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-41: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-42: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes . . . .
Table 2-43: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU data . . . .
Table 2-44: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP . . . . . . . .
Table 2-45: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the subrack-OSP
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-46: M3UA data negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-47: CGI negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-48: M3UA link data negotiated for interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-49: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG
attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-50: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the device IP address . .
Table 2-51: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the port IP address . .
Table 2-52: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSC router . . . .
Table 2-53: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-54: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-55: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-56: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-57: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-58: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-59: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2-60: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-1: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes (BM/TC
separated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-2: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP and DSP . .
Table 3-3: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-4: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the subrack-OSP
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-5: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GBSR cabinet . . . . .
Table 3-6: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEPS . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-7: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a GTCS . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-8: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a power distribution
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-9: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUM . . . . . . .

xii

2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
3-4
3-6
3-6
3-11
3-13
3-15
3-18
3-21
3-25

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

List of Tables

Table 3-10: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUT . . . . . .
Table 3-11: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GTNU . . . . . . .
Table 3-12: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSCU . . . . . . .
Table 3-13: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GGCU . . . . . . .
Table 3-14: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUX . . . . . .
Table 3-15: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP . . . . . .
Table 3-16: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEIUA. . . . . . .
Table 3-17: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUA . . . . . .
Table 3-18: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUT . . . . . . . .
Table 3-19: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUT . . . . . .
Table 3-20: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUB. . . . . . . .
Table 3-21: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB . . . . . .
Table 3-22: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG . . . . . .
Table 3-23: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG . . . . . .
Table 3-24: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-25: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-26: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-27: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GTCS 6 and GTCS 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-28: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Ater connection path
between the GMPS and the GTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-29: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Ater connection path
between the GEPS and the GTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-30: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an OML . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-31: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an Ater signaling link . . .
Table 3-32: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an A Interface E1/T1 . .
Table 3-33: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an SS7 signaling link. . . .
Table 3-34: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-35: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-36: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN clock . . . .
Table 3-37: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-38: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-39: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-40: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-41: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-42: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-43: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock on line 0 for
the GTCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-44: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock on line 1 for
the GTCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-45: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock
for the GTCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-46: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock on line 0 for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-47: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock on line 1 for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-48: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock . . .

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

3-29
3-31
3-32
3-34
3-35
3-39
3-42
3-42
3-48
3-48
3-52
3-52
3-56
3-60
3-74
3-74
3-75
3-75
3-85
3-85
3-88
3-91
3-94
3-97
3-101
3-104
3-107
3-109
3-112
3-115
3-118
3-121
3-123
3-127
3-127
3-130
3-131
3-132
3-134

xiii

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

List of Tables

Table 3-49: Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-50: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock
for the GEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-1: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes (BM/TC
combined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-2: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP and DSP . .
Table 4-3: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-4: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the subrack-OSP
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-5: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GBSR cabinet . . . . .
Table 4-6: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEPS . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-7: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a power distribution
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-8: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUM . . . . . . .
Table 4-9: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUT . . . . . . .
Table 4-10: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSCU . . . . . . .
Table 4-11: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GTNU . . . . . . .
Table 4-12: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GGCU . . . . . . .
Table 4-13: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUX . . . . . .
Table 4-14: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP . . . . . .
Table 4-15: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEIUA. . . . . . .
Table 4-16: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUA . . . . . .
Table 4-17: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUB. . . . . . . .
Table 4-18: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB . . . . . .
Table 4-19: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG . . . . . .
Table 4-20: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG . . . . . .
Table 4-21: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-22: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-23: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-24: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an A Interface E1/T1 . .
Table 4-25: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an SS7 signaling link. . . .
Table 4-26: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-27: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-28: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN clock . . . .
Table 4-29: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-30: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-31: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-32: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-33: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-34: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-35: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock on line 0 for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-36: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock on line 1 for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-37: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock . . .

xiv

3-136
3-138
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-11
4-13
4-15
4-18
4-21
4-26
4-28
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-36
4-39
4-39
4-45
4-45
4-49
4-53
4-65
4-65
4-66
4-72
4-75
4-79
4-82
4-85
4-87
4-90
4-93
4-96
4-99
4-101
4-105
4-105
4-108

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

List of Tables

Table 4-38: Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4-39: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock
for the GEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-1: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes (BM/TC
combined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-2: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU entities . . .
Table 5-3: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the signaling transfer
entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-4: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the subrack-OSP
mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-5: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GBSR cabinet . . . . .
Table 5-6: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEPS . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-7: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a power distribution
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-8: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUM . . . . . . .
Table 5-9: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUT . . . . . . .
Table 5-10: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSCU . . . . . . .
Table 5-11: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GTNU . . . . . . .
Table 5-12: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GGCU . . . . . . .
Table 5-13: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUX . . . . . .
Table 5-14: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP . . . . . .
Table 5-15: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUA . . . . . .
Table 5-16: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUB. . . . . . . .
Table 5-17: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB . . . . . .
Table 5-18: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG . . . . . .
Table 5-19: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG . . . . . .
Table 5-20: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-21: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-22: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the communication link
between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-23: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3UA link set . . .
Table 5-24: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3UA link. . . . .
Table 5-25: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3UA route . . . .
Table 5-26: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-27: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-28: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN clock . . . .
Table 5-29: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-30: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-31: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-32: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-33: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote NSVL on the
Gb interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-34: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC on the Gb
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-35: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock . . .
Table 5-36: Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock for
the GMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5-37: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference clock
for the GEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

4-110
4-112
5-4
5-6
5-7
5-12
5-14
5-16
5-19
5-22
5-27
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-35
5-39
5-42
5-51
5-51
5-56
5-60
5-72
5-72
5-73
5-79
5-82
5-85
5-87
5-90
5-93
5-95
5-98
5-101
5-104
5-107
5-109
5-112
5-114
5-116

xv

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

List of Tables

Table 6-1: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a HorizonMacro BTS . .
Table 6-2: Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a HorizonMacro BTS . .
Table 6-3: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a site chain . . . . .
Table 6-4: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a 2G external cell . .
Table 6-5: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a 3G external cell . .
Table 6-6: Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring adjacent cells . . . .
Table 7-1: Configuration principles of BSC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-2: Links on the A and Ater Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-3: Bandwidth of OM timeslots and signaling timeslots on the Ater interface. . . . .
Table 7-4: Configuration principles of BSC clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-5: Configuration principles of BSC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-6: Configuration principles of BSC clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-7: Configuration principles of BSC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-8: Configuration principles of BSC clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-9: Coding scheme and transmission rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-10: Parameters of the Gb interface links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-11: Mapping between the frequency bands and the frequency ranges . . . . . . . .
Table 7-12: Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface before timeslot arrangement by the
BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-13: Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface after timeslot arrangement by the
BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-14: Timeslot assignment in 1:1 multiplexing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-15: Timeslot assignment in 2:1 multiplexing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-16: Timeslot assignment in 4:1 multiplexing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-17: Timeslot assignment on A0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-18: Timeslot assignment on A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7-19: Timeslot assignment on A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

6-4
6-18
6-32
6-36
6-39
6-42
7-4
7-9
7-12
7-13
7-16
7-21
7-24
7-28
7-29
7-31
7-38

. .

7-44

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7-45
7-47
7-48
7-48
7-50
7-51
7-51

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

About
This
Manual

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

What is covered in this manual?


This document describes how to perform the BSC initial configuration on the LMT. The contents
of the document include task scenarios, working principles, and operating procedures of the BSC
initial configuration. This document can be used as a guide to configure data during deployment.

Related information
For changes in the document, refer to Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial Configuration Guide on
page 8-2.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Revision history

Revision history

The following sections show the revision status of this document.

Version information
The following table lists the supported versions of this manual in order of issue:
Issue

Date of issue

Remarks

Aug 2008

Initial Release

Resolution of Service Requests


The following Service Requests are resolved in this document:
Service Request

CMBP
Number

N/A

N/A

Remarks

Incorporation of Change Notices


The following Change Notices (CN) are incorporated in this document:
CN Date

CN Number

N/A

N/A

Title

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

General information

General information

Purpose
Motorola documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation,
and maintenance of the Motorola equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all
personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or expressed, for any risk of damage, loss or
reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer,
or anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters,
or recommendations made in this document.
These documents are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by
Motorola. They can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such
training.

NOTE
If this document was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it is not
updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it
was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software
release, then Motorola automatically supplies corrections and posts on the Motorola
customer website.

Cross references
References made to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references,
emphasized in blue text in electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are
not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of
contents.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Text conventions

Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola documents to represent keyboard input
text, screen output text, and special key sequences.

Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this sentence.
Items of interest within a command appear like this sentence.

Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental
variables that appear on the screen are shown like this sentence.
Items of interest within a screen display appear like this sentence.

Special key sequences


Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRL-c or CTRL+C

Press the Ctrl and C keys at the same time.

CTRL-SHIFT-c or
CTRL+SHIFT+C

Press the Ctrl, Shift, and C keys at the same time.

ALT-f or ALT+F

Press the Alt and F keys at the same time.

ALT+SHIFT+F11

Press the Alt, Shift and F11 keys at the same time.

Press the pipe symbol key.

RETURN or ENTER

Press the Return or Enter key.

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Contacting Motorola

Contacting Motorola

Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our documents.

24hour support
If you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, contact the Customer Network
Resolution Center (CNRC) for immediate assistance. The 24hour telephone numbers are listed
at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer Network Resolution Center
contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact
the Local Motorola Office.

Questions and comments


Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to the email address:
mydocs@motorola.com.

Errors
To report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer Network Resolution Center) and
provide the following information to enable CNRC to open an SR (Service Request):

The document type

The document title, part number, and revision character

The page number with the error

A detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solution

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Security advice

Security advice

Motorola systems and equipment provide security parameters that the operator configures
based on their particular operating environment. Motorola recommends setting and using
these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Consider protecting the
confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability
to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about
the parties involved.
In certain instances, Motorola makes specific recommendations regarding security practices.
The implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the
system lies with the operator of the system.
Contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information, from the menu located to the left of the
Login box. Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local
Motorola Office.

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Warnings, cautions, and notes

Warnings, cautions, and notes

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all
documents of this Motorola document set.

Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are
used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A
warning has the following format:

WARNING
Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.

Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems,
software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents
no danger to personnel. A caution has the following format:

CAUTION
Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.

Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional
information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:

NOTE
Note text.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Safety

Safety

General safety
The following general safety guidelines apply to Motorola equipment:

The power jack and mating plug of the power cable must meet International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.

NOTE
Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations 68P81150E62.

Power down or unplug the equipment before servicing.

Using non-Motorola parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty.
Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair instructions.

Portions of Motorola equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge.


Use precautions to prevent damage.

Electromagnetic energy
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:

ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure
to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.

Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general


public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national
regulations.

Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on
the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the
risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within
the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC).

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Caring for the environment

Caring for the environment

The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of
Motorola supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.
Contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24hour
telephone numbers are listed at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com. Select Customer
Network Resolution Center contact information. Alternatively if you do not have access
to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local Motorola Office.

In EU countries
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European
Union (EU) directives and any amendments to these directives when using Motorola equipment
in EU countries.

Disposal of Motorola equipment


European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Do not dispose of Motorola equipment in landfill sites. In the EU, Motorola in conjunction
with a recycling partner ensures that equipment is collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.

Disposal of surplus packaging


European Parliament and Council Directive 94/62/EC Packaging and Packaging Waste
Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipients
responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.

In non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Motorola equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance
with national and regional regulations.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

CMM labeling and disclosure table

CMM labeling and disclosure table

The Peoples Republic of China requires that our products comply with China Management
Methods (CMM) environmental regulations. (China Management Methods refers to the
regulation Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.)
Two items are used to demonstrate compliance; the label and the disclosure table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product.

Logo 1 means the product contains no substances in excess of the maximum concentration
value for materials identified in the China Management Methods regulation.

Logo 2 means that the product may contain substances in excess of the maximum
concentration value for materials identified in the China Management Methods regulation,
and has an Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) in years. The example shown
uses 50 years.

Logo 1

Logo 2

The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during which the Toxic
and Hazardous Substances (T&HS) contained in the Electronic Information Product (EIP)
will not leak or mutate causing environmental pollution or bodily injury from the use of the
EIP. The EFUP indicated by the Logo 2 label applies to a product and all its parts. Certain
field-replaceable parts, such as battery modules, can have a different EFUP and are marked
separately.
The Disclosure table is intended only to communicate compliance with China requirements.
It is not intended to communicate compliance with EU RoHS or any other environmental
requirements.

10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Motorola document set

Motorola document set

The Motorola document sets provide the information to operate, install, and maintain the
Motorola equipment.

Ordering documents and CD-ROMs


With internet access available, to view, download, or order documents (original or revised), visit
the Motorola Lifecycles Customer web page at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com, or
contact your Motorola account representative.
Without internet access available, order hard-copy documents or CD-ROMs from your Motorola
Local Office or Representative.
If Motorola changes the content of a document after the original printing date, Motorola
publishes a new version with the same part number but a different revision character.

Document banner definitions


A banner indicates that some information contained in the document is not yet approved for
general customer use. A banner is oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,
PRELIMINARY UNDER DEVELOPMENT.

Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the
network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of particular
countries, this encryption occurs at different levels. The encryption may be individually
standardized or may not be present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally
implemented. The document set covers encryption as if fully implemented. Limitations on the
encryption included in the particular software being delivered, are covered in the Release Notes
that accompany the individual software release.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Data encryption

12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

1
Definition of BSC Initial Configuration

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

1-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Definition of BSC Initial Configuration

Chapter 1: Definition of BSC Initial Configuration

Definition of BSC Initial Configuration

BSC initial configuration refers to the configuration performed after BSC installation. BSC
initial configuration is based on the hardware configuration, network planning, and data
negotiated with other devices.
A BSC initial configuration file in .dat format is generated after initial configuration. The data in
this file must be complete, correct, and valid. Thus, the data can take effect after being loaded
to the LMT and GOMU for online BSC commissioning.
BSC initial configuration is performed on the LMT in offline mode. The configuration data is
used for BSC commissioning and loading. The correct initial configuration data is a prerequisite
for the proper operation of the BSC.
For the data configuration after the BSC is operational, refer to BSC Reconfiguration Guide.

1-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

2
Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

2-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

The procedure for BSC initial configuration varies with scenarios.


The BSC has different configuration modes in terms of subrack combination. Table 2-1 lists
these configuration modes.

Table 2-1

Scenarios of BSC initial configuration

Configuration Mode

Description

BM/TC Separate

The BSC is configured with the GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. In this
case, the A interface uses the TDM transmission mode.

BM/TC Together

The BSC is configured with the GMPS and GEPS. The boards of the
GTCS are configured in the GMPS and GEPS. In this case, the A
interface uses the TDM transmission mode.

IP on A Interface

The BSC is configured with the GMPS and GEPS. The GTCS is not
configured. The A interface uses the IP transmission mode. In this
case, the BSC must be connected to Motorola core network and the
TC must be integrated with Motorola MGW.

NOTE
The GMPS and GEPS are called BM in general. The GTCS is called TC for short. The
BM and TC have three combination modes. Only one of them can be selected.
There are three scenarios of BSC initial configuration in terms of subrack combination. Select
one according to actual requirements.
The BSC initial configuration is based on the initial configuration scenario. The procedure for
BSC initial configuration varies with scenarios.

2-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Separated

Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Separated

When the BM and TC are configured in different subracks, follow the fixed procedures and
methods to perform the BSC initial configuration.

Prerequisites

The BSC global data is prepared. For details, refer to BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated)
on page 2-3.

The A Interface data is negotiated for interconnection. For details, refer to A Interface Data
Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) on page 2-5.

The Gb interface data is negotiated for interconnection. For details, refer to Gb Interface
Data Negotiated for Interconnection on page 2-7.

Procedure
Procedure 2-1

Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Separated

Configure the BSC (BM/TC separated).


Mandatory. Refer to Chapter 3 Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated).

Configure the BTS.


Mandatory. Refer to Chapter 6 Configuring the BTS.

Back up the LMT local data.


Mandatory. Refer to BSC LMT User Guide, section Backing Up LMT Local Data.

Activate the license file.


Mandatory. Refer to Activating the BSC License.

Load the local configuration files.


Mandatory. Refer to BSC LMT User Guide, section Loading and Restoring the
Local Data File.

BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated)


This section provides examples of BSC global data when the BM and TC are configured in
different subracks.
BSC global data is determined during network planning. It is the basis of configuration of
all the other data. After the BSC global data takes effect, do not modify the data unless the
network is planned again.
BSC global data includes BSC attributes, SS7 signaling points, and subrack-OSP mapping.

68P02909W07-A

2-3

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

BSC Attributes
Table 2-2

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

Basic Data

BSC Name

BSC001

Network planning

Country Code

86

Network planning

City Code

021

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Um Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Abis Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

NTP Server

10.161.72.251

Negotiation with the


OMC-S/T

BSC Subrack
Combination Type

BM/TC Separate

Network planning

SS7 Signaling Point


Table 2-3
and DSP

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

OSP

OSP Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Encoding Scheme

14

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

DSP Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

DSP

If there is no direct physical link between the OSP and the DSP, configure the STPs. In this
case, set Using STP to Yes. For examples of the data negotiated and planned for configuring
the STP, refer to Table 2-4.

2-4

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide


Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Table 2-4

A Interface

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

STP

STP Name

STPMSC001

BSC internal planning

STP (Hex)

C1

Network planning

Signaling point protocol

ITU-T

Network planning

Subrack-OSP Mapping
Table 2-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
subrack-OSP mapping
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

OSP

B1

Network planning

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP


Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
This section describes the A Interface data negotiated and planned for the connection between
the BSC and the MSC and provides the examples of the data.

Example of A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


Table 2-6

Signaling code negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be Configured

Example

Source

OSP

OSP Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

DSP Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

DSP

68P02909W07-A

2-5

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Table 2-7

Chapter 2:

CGI negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be Configured

Example

Source

Basic Attribute
Parameters

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

01

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

Table 2-8

Signaling link data negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

SS7 Link

SLC

Negotiation with the peer

SLC Send

Negotiation with the peer

TS

TS16

Negotiation with the peer

CIC range

0-65535

Negotiation with the peer

Rate Type

64 kbit/s

Negotiation with the peer

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Basic Data

Table 2-9

Optical interface board attribute negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

SubBoard
Attribute

Attributes of
the Ports on
the OIUa Board

Example

Source

Tributary
Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

2-6

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


The A Interface data negotiated for the connection between the BSC and the MSC is as follows:

Signaling point code parameters


Signaling point code parameters are the OPC, DPC, coding scheme, and network indicator.
The settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent.

CGI parameters
CGI identifies a cell in the GSM system. CGI consists of the MCC, MNC, LAC, and CI. The
settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent.

A Interface signaling link parameters


A Interface signaling link parameters are the number or A Interface signaling links,
SLC, SLC Send, link timeslot, and the CIC range of each signaling link. The settings of
the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent. The
cable connections must be correct.

A Interface tag
A Interface tag can be set to GSM_PHASE_1, GSM_PHASE_2, or GSM_PHASE_2+. The
setting of this parameter on the BSC side and that on the MSC side must be consistent.

Speech version parameters


The speech version on the BSC side can be set to full rate version 1, full rate
version 2, or half rate version 1. The setting of this parameter on the MSC
side and on the BSC side must be consistent.

Location update period parameter


The location update period is defined by T3212. The location update period on the MSC
side must be longer than the location update period on the BSC side.

Authentication and ciphering parameters


The settings of authentication and ciphering parameters on the BSC side and on the
MSC side must be consistent.

Inter-BSC or Inter-MSC handover parameters


If inter-BSC or inter-MSC handovers are required, parameters such as CGI, BCCH
frequency, NCC, BCC, and Co-MSC must be negotiated on both the BSC side and
the MSC side.

Optical interface board attributes


Optical interface board attributes are Tributary Numbering, TX J0 Byte, Expect RX J0
Byte, TX J1 Byte, Expect RX J1 Byte, TX J2 Byte, Expect RX J2 Byte, TX Frame Format,
and RX Frame Format. The settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on
the MSC side must be consistent.

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


This section provides the examples of the Gb interface data negotiated and planned for
interconnection when the built-in PCU is used.

68P02909W07-A

2-7

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Board Attributes
Table 2-10
attributes

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG

Parameter

Example

Source

WorkMode

E1

Negotiation with the SGSN

Frame Format

CRC4_MULTIFRAME

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-11
IP address

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the device

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-12
IP address

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the port

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

IP Address

192.168.70.132

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-13
router

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSC

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Destination IP Address

192.168.70.0

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Gateway

192.168.70.136

Negotiation with the SGSN

2-8

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Gb over FR
Table 2-14 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over FR

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Table 2-15 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on
the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Frame Relay Protocol Type

Q933

Negotiation with the SGSN

Occupied Timeslot

T1-T16

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N391)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N392)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N393)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (T391)

10

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-16 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSVC Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Data Link Connection Identifier

16

Negotiation with the SGSN

68P02909W07-A

2-9

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Table 2-17 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BVC Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Gb over IP
Table 2-18 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over IP

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Table 2-19 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Local NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

UDP Port No.

Negotiation with the SGSN

PIU Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

PIU Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-20 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Remote NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Address

192.168.80.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Port No.

Negotiation with the SGSN

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

2-10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Table 2-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BVC Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A

2-11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Combined

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Combined

When the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack, follow the fixed procedures and
methods to perform the BSC initial configuration.

Prerequisites

The BSC global data is prepared. For details, refer to BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined,
Built-in PCU) on page 2-12.

The A Interface data is negotiated for interconnection. For details, refer to A Interface Data
Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) on page 2-5.

The Gb interface data is negotiated for interconnection. For details, refer to Gb Interface
Data Negotiated for Interconnection on page 2-7.

Procedure
Procedure 2-2

Initial Configuration Scenario: BM/TC Combined

Configure the BSC (BM/TC combined).


Mandatory. Refer to Chapter 4 Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined).

Configure the BTS.


Mandatory. Refer to Chapter 6 Configuring the BTS.

Back up the LMT local data.


Mandatory. Refer to BSC LMT User Guide, section Backing Up LMT Local Data.

Activate the license file.


Mandatory. Refer to Activating the BSC License.

Load the local configuration files.


Mandatory. Refer to BSC LMT User Guide, section Loading and Restoring the
Local Data File.

BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined, Built-in PCU)


This section provides examples of BSC global data when the BM and TC are configured in the
same subrack and the built-in PCU is used.
BSC global data is determined during network planning. It is the basis of the configuration of
all the other data. After the BSC global data takes effect, do not modify the data unless the
network is planned again.
BSC global data includes BSC attributes, SS7 signaling points, and subrack-OSP mapping.

2-12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined, Built-in PCU)

BSC Attributes
Table 2-22

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

Base Data

BSC Name

BSC001

Network planning

Country Code

86

Network planning

City Code

021

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Um Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Abis Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

NTP Server

10.161.72.251

Negotiation with the


OMC-S/T

BSC Subrack
Combination Type

BM/TC Together

Network planning

PCU Type

Inner

Network planning

Software
Parameters

SS7 Signaling Point


Table 2-23 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7
OSP and DSP
Parameter

Parameter to Be Configured

Example

Source

OSP

OSP Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Encoding Scheme

14

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

DSP Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

DSP

If there is no direct physical link between the OSP and the DSP, configure the STPs. In this
case, set Using STP to Yes. For examples of the data negotiated and planned for configuring
the STP, refer to Table 2-24.

68P02909W07-A

2-13

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Table 2-24

Chapter 2:

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP

Parameter

Parameter to Be Configured

Example

Source

STP

STP Name

STPMSC001

BSC internal planning

STP (Hex)

C1

Network planning

Signaling point protocol

ITU-T

Network planning

Subrack-OSP Mapping
Table 2-25 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
subrack-OSP mapping
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

OSP

B1

Network planning

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP


Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
This section describes the A Interface data negotiated and planned for the connection between
the BSC and the MSC, and provides the examples of the data.

Example of A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


Table 2-26

Signaling code negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

OSP

OSP Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

DSP Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

DSP

Table 2-27

CGI negotiated for interconnection

Parameter
Basic Attribute
Parameters

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

01

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

2-14

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide


Data Negotiated for Interconnection (Non-IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Table 2-28

A Interface

Signaling link data negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

SS7 Link

SLC

Negotiation with the peer

SLC Send

Negotiation with the peer

TS

TS16

Negotiation with the peer

CIC range

0-65535

Negotiation with the peer

Rate Type

64 kbit/s

Negotiation with the peer

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Basic Data

Table 2-29

Optical interface board attribute negotiated for interconnection


Parameter to Be
Configured

Parameter
SubBoard Attribute

Attributes of the
Ports on the OIUa
Board

Example

Source

Tributary
Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH
DEFAULT
(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH
DEFAULT
(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH
DEFAULT
(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH
DEFAULT
(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH
DEFAULT
(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH
DEFAULT
(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

68P02909W07-A

2-15

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


The A Interface data negotiated for the connection between the BSC and the MSC is as follows:

Signaling point code parameters


Signaling point code parameters are the OPC, DPC, coding scheme, and network indicator.
The settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent.

CGI parameters
CGI identifies a cell in the GSM system. CGI consists of the MCC, MNC, LAC, and CI. The
settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent.

A Interface signaling link parameters


A Interface signaling link parameters are the number or A Interface signaling links,
SLC, SLC Send, link timeslot, and the CIC range of each signaling link. The settings of
the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent. The
cable connections must be correct.

A Interface tag
A Interface tag can be set to GSM_PHASE_1, GSM_PHASE_2, or GSM_PHASE_2+. The
setting of this parameter on the BSC side and that on the MSC side must be consistent.

Speech version parameters


The speech version on the BSC side can be set to full rate version 1, full
rate version 2, or half rate version 1. The setting of this parameter on the
MSC and on the BSC side must be consistent.

Location update period parameter


The location update period is defined by T3212. The location update period on the MSC
side must be longer than the location update period on the BSC side.

Authentication and ciphering parameters


The settings of authentication and ciphering parameters on the BSC side and on the
MSC side must be consistent.

Inter-BSC or Inter-MSC handover parameters


If inter-BSC or inter-MSC handovers are required, parameters such as CGI, BCCH
frequency, NCC, BCC, and Co-MSC must be negotiated on both the BSC side and
the MSC side.

Optical interface board attributes


Optical interface board attributes are Tributary Numbering, TX J0 Byte, Expect RX J0
Byte, TX J1 Byte, Expect RX J1 Byte, TX J2 Byte, Expect RX J2 Byte, TX Frame Format,
and RX Frame Format. The settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on
the MSC side must be consistent.

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


This section provides the examples of the Gb interface data negotiated and planned for
interconnection when the built-in PCU is used.

2-16

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Board Attributes
Table 2-30
attributes

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG

Parameter

Example

Source

WorkMode

E1

Negotiation with the SGSN

Frame Format

CRC4_MULTIFRAME

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-31
IP address

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the device

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-32
IP address

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the port

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

IP Address

192.168.70.132

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-33
router

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSC

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Destination IP Address

192.168.70.0

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Gateway

192.168.70.136

Negotiation with the SGSN

68P02909W07-A

2-17

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Gb over FR
Table 2-34 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over FR

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Table 2-35 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on
the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Frame Relay Protocol Type

Q933

Negotiation with the SGSN

Occupied Timeslot

T1-T16

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N391)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N392)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N393)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (T391)

10

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-36 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSVC Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Data Link Connection Identifier

16

Negotiation with the SGSN

2-18

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Table 2-37 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BVC Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Gb over IP
Table 2-38 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over IP

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Table 2-39 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Local NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

UDP Port No.

Negotiation with the SGSN

PIU Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

PIU Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-40 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Remote NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Address

192.168.80.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Port No.

Negotiation with the SGSN

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

68P02909W07-A

2-19

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Table 2-41 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BVC Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

2-20

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Initial Configuration Scenario: IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface

Initial Configuration Scenario: IP Transmission Mode


on the A Interface

When the BSC is configured with IP transmission mode on the A Interface, follow the fixed
procedures and methods to perform the BSC initial configuration.

Prerequisites

The BSC global data is prepared. For details, refer to BSC Global Data (IP on A Interface,
Built-in PCU) on page 2-21.

The A Interface data is negotiated for interconnection. For details, refer to A Interface Data
Negotiated for Interconnection (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface) on page 2-24.

The Gb interface data is negotiated for interconnection. For details, refer to Gb Interface
Data Negotiated for Interconnection on page 2-7.

Procedure
Procedure 2-3

Initial Configuration Scenario: IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface

Configure the BSC (IP transmission mode on the A interface).


Mandatory. Refer to Chapter 5 Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A
Interface).

Configure the BTS.


Mandatory. Refer to Chapter 6 Configuring the BTS.

Back up the LMT local data.


Mandatory. Refer to BSC LMT User Guide, section Backing Up LMT Local Data.

Activate the license file.


Mandatory. Refer to Activating the BSC License.

Load the local configuration files.


Mandatory. Refer to BSC LMT User Guide, section Loading and Restoring the
Local Data File.

BSC Global Data (IP on A Interface, Built-in PCU)


This section provides examples of BSC global data when the A Interface uses the IP transmission
mode, and when the built-in PCU is used.
BSC global data is determined during network planning. It is the basis of configuration of
all other data. After the BSC global data takes effect, do not modify it unless the network is
planned again.
68P02909W07-A

2-21

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Global Data (IP on A Interface, Built-in PCU)

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

BSC global data includes BSC attributes, M3UA data, and subrack-OSP mapping. The examples
of configurations of the BSC global data are as follows:

BSC Attributes
Table 2-42

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

Basic Data

BSC Name

BSC001

Network planning

Country Code

86

Network planning

City Code

021

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Um Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Abis Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

NTP Server

10.161.72.251

Negotiation with the


OMC-S/T

BSC Subrack
Combination Type

IP on A Interface

Network planning

PCUType

Inner

Network planning

Software
Parameters

M3AU Data
Table 2-43
data

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

Local Entity

Local Entity Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Encoding Scheme

14

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

Entity Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

LinkSet Name

Network planning

Adjacent Destination
Entity Name

MSC001

Network planning

Destination Entity

M3UA Config
Linkset

Continued

2-22

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

BSC Global Data (IP on A Interface, Built-in PCU)

Table 2-43 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU
data (Continued)
Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

M3UA Config Route

Destination Entity Name

MSC001

Network planning

Linkset Name

Network planning

If there is no direct physical link between the local entity and the destination entity, configure
a signaling transfer entity. When configuring the destination entity, set Using STP to Yes.
When configuring the M3UA link set, set Adjacent Destination Entity Name to the signaling
transfer entity name. For examples of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
signaling transfer entity, refer to Table 2-44.

Table 2-44

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

STP Entity

STE Name

MGW001

BSC internal planning

STP (Hex)

C1

Network planning

Protocol

RFC3332

Network planning

Subrack-OSP Mapping
Table 2-45 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
subrack-OSP mapping
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

OSP

B1

Network planning

68P02909W07-A

2-23

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Chapter 2:

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection (IP


Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
This section provides examples of the A Interface data negotiated and planned for
interconnection when the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Example of A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


Table 2-46

M3UA data negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

Local Entity

Local Entity Name

BSC001

BSC internal
planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

Destination Entity
Name

MSC001

BSC internal
planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

Linkset Name

Network planning

Adjacent Destination
Entity Name

MSC001

Network planning

Destination Entity
Name

MSC001

Network planning

Linkset Name

Network planning

Destination Entity

M3UA Link Set

M3UA Route

Table 2-47

CGI negotiated for interconnection

Parameter
Basic Attribute
Parameters

Parameter to Be
Configured

Example

Source

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

01

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

2-24

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Table 2-48

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

M3UA link data negotiated for interconnection

Parameter

Parameter to Be Configured

Example

Source

M3UA

Linkset Name

Negotiation with the peer

Local Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Peer Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Local Address 1

192.168.10.2

Negotiation with the peer

Peer Address 1

192.168.30.1

Negotiation with the peer

Send Check Sum


Validation Flag

Yes

Network planning

Check Sum Type

CRC32

Negotiation with the peer

SCTP

A Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


The A Interface data negotiated for the connection between the BSC and the MSC is as follows:

M3UA data
M3UA data involves the M3UA entities, M3UA link set, and M3UA route. The M3UA data
on the BSC side and that on the MSC side must be consistent.

CGI parameters
CGI identifies a cell in the GSM system. CGI consists of the MCC, MNC, LAC, and CI. The
settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent.

M3UA link parameters


When the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode, the M3UA link parameters include
the Linkset Name, Local Port No., Peer Port No., Local Address 1, Local Address 2, Peer
Address 1, Peer Address 2, Send Check Sum Validation Flag, and Check Sum Type. The
settings of the parameters on the BSC side and on the MSC side must be consistent.

A Interface tag
A Interface tag can be set to GSM_PHASE_1, GSM_PHASE_2, or GSM_PHASE_2+. The
setting of this parameter on the BSC side and that on the MSC side must be consistent.

Location update period parameter


The location update period is defined by T3212. The location update period on the MSC
side must be longer than the location update period on the BSC side.

Authentication and ciphering parameters


The settings of authentication and ciphering parameters on the BSC side and on the
MSC side must be consistent.

Inter-BSC or Inter-MSC handover parameters


If inter-BSC or inter-MSC handovers are required, parameters such as CGI, BCCH
frequency, NCC, BCC, and Co-MSC must be negotiated on both the BSC side and
the MSC side.

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection


This section provides examples of the Gb interface data negotiated and planned for
interconnection when the built-in PCU is used.
68P02909W07-A

2-25

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Board Attributes
Table 2-49
attributes

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG

Parameter

Example

Source

WorkMode

E1

Negotiation with the SGSN

Frame Format

CRC4_MULTIFRAME

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-50
IP address

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the device

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-51
IP address

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the port

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

IP Address

192.168.70.132

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-52
router

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSC

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Destination IP Address

192.168.70.0

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the SGSN

Gateway

192.168.70.136

Negotiation with the SGSN

2-26

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Gb over FR
Table 2-53 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over FR

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of


users)

Network planning

Table 2-54 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on
the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Frame Relay Protocol Type

Q933

Negotiation with the SGSN

Occupied Timeslot

T1-T16

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N391)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N392)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (N393)

Negotiation with the SGSN

DTE Parameter (T391)

10

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-55 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSVC Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Data Link Connection Identifier

16

Negotiation with the SGSN

68P02909W07-A

2-27

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

Table 2-56 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BVC Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Gb over IP
Table 2-57 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over IP

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Table 2-58 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Local NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

UDP Port No.

Negotiation with the SGSN

PIU Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

PIU Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Table 2-59 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Remote NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Address

192.168.80.1

Negotiation with the SGSN

IP Port No.

Negotiation with the SGSN

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the SGSN

2-28

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Table 2-60 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BVC Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

2-29

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Gb Interface Data Negotiated for Interconnection

Chapter 2: Scenarios of BSC Initial Configuration

2-30

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

3
Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

3-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

This section describes how to configure the BSC global data, the devices, the links, and the clock
on the BSC Local Manager when the BM and the TC are configured in different subracks.

3-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the BSC Global Data (BM/TC Separated)

When the BM and the TC are configured in different subracks, the BSC global data includes
BSC attributes, SS7 signaling point data, and subrack-OSP mapping.

Configuring the BSC Attributes


This section describes how to configure BSC attributes. In the initial configuration of BSC
attributes, configure only the basic attributes. For other attributes, use the default settings.
The BSC attributes include:

Basic Data

Flow Control Data

BSC Timer

Software Parameters

User Resource Binding

SCCP

NSS and BSSGP

MSC Pool Parameters

Null-NRI and DPC Route

Trigger Saving Power Function

IP Transfers

Abis Congestion Control

Single Pass Exclude MSISDN Number

Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The BSC attributes have been determined in network planning.

68P02909W07-A

3-3

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Attributes

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Preparation
Table 3-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes
(BM/TC separated)
Parameter

Example

Source

BSC Name

BSC001

Network planning

Country Code

86

Network planning

City Code

021

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Um Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Abis Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

NTP Server

10.161.72.251

Negotiation with the OMC-S/T

BSC Subrack Combination


Type

BM/TC Separate

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-1
1

Configuring the BSC Attributes

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

3-4

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Procedure 3-1
2

Choose Configure BSC Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1

Configuring the BSC Attributes (Continued)

Configure BSC Attributes dialog box

On the Basic Data tab page, set the parameters by referring to Figure 3-1.

NOTE
The parameters not listed in Table 3-1 are optional. Use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.
4

Click Finish. The BSC attributes are configured.

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points


This section describes how to configure SS7 signaling points. Configure the Originating
Signaling Point (OSP) and the Destination Signaling Point (DSP) If there is no direct physical
link between the OSP and the DSP, configure Signaling Transfer Points (STPs).
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

3-5

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

CAUTION

The OSP must be configured before the DSP is configured.

The OSP and DSP must be configured before the STP is configured.

The names and codes of signaling points must be unique.

The BSC can be configured with up to four OSPs, 32 DSPs, and 32 STPs. For
details on the configuration of multiple OSPs, refer to Local Multiple Signaling
Points.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 3-2
and DSP

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP

Parameter

Example

Source

OPC Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Encoding Scheme

14

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

DPC Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DPC (Hex)

D1

Network planning

Table 3-3

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP

Parameter

Example

Source

STP Name

STPMSC001

BSC internal planning

STP (Hex)

C1

Network planning

Signaling point protocol

ITU-T

Network planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the SS7 Signaling Points.

Procedure

Configure the OSP.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure SS7 Signaling Point from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

3-6

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 3-2

c.

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (1)

On the OPC tab page, click Add OPC. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3

Add OPC dialog box

68P02909W07-A

3-7

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

NOTE
If an OPC exists, OPC Name, Encoding Scheme, and Network Indicator
of the OSP are displayed by default in the dialog box shown in Figure 3-3.

d.

Set the parameters of the OSP by referring to Table 3-2.

e.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-2.

Configure the DSP.


a.

In the dialog box shown in Figure 3-2, click the DPC tab to display the tab page,
as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4

b.

Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (2)

Click Add DPC. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.

3-8

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Figure 3-5

Add DPC dialog box

NOTE
If there is no direct physical link between the OSP and the DSP, configure
the STPs. In the dialog box shown in Figure 3-5, set Using STP to Yes.

c.

Set the parameters of the DSP by referring to Table 3-2.

d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-2.

Check whether there is a direct physical link between the OSP and the DSP.
If...

Then...

There is a direct physical link between the


OSP and the DSP

The task is complete.

There is no direct physical link between the


OSP and the DSP

Go to Step Configure the STP.

Configure the STP.


a.

In the dialog box shown in Figure 3-2, click the STP tab to display the tab page,
as shown in Figure 3-6.

68P02909W07-A

3-9

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Figure 3-6

b.

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (3)

Click Add STP. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7

Add STP dialog box

3-10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

c.

Set the parameters of the STP by referring to Table 3-3.

d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-2.

Click Finish. The SS7 signaling points are configured.

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping


This section describes how to assign an OSP for the GMPS/GEPS to establish the mapping
between the subrack and the OSP.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
The GMPS is displayed by default on the LMT. Configure only its OSP on the LMT.
For the GEPS, configure the GEPS and its OSP on the LMT. The GTCS does not
require an OSP.

Prerequisites
The OSP is already configured.

Preparation
Table 3-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
subrack-OSP mapping
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

OSP

B1

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-2
1

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

Procedure 3-2
2

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping (Continued)

Choose Configure Subrack-OSP Mapping configuring the PTPBVC from the shortcut
menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8

Configure Subrack-OSP Mapping dialog box

Set the OSP of the GMPS by referring to Table 3-4.

Click Finish. The subrack-OSP mapping is configured.

3-12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configure the BSC Devices (BM/TC Separated)

Configure the BSC Devices (BM/TC Separated)

This section describes how to configure the BSC devices on the LMT, when the BM and TC are
configured in different subracks.

Adding a GBSR Cabinet


This section describes how to add a GBSR cabinet and configure its attributes on the LMT. When
the BM and TC are configured in different subracks, the GBSR cabinet can be configured
on the BSC side or on the MSC side. When placed on the MSC side, the GBSR cabinet can
be configured with only the GTCS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional, when the GTCS is placed on the MSC side.

NOTE
When the BM and TC are configured in different subracks, the GBSR cabinet can be
configured on the BSC side or on the MSC side. When the GBSR cabinet is placed on
the BSC side, it is a local GBSR cabinet. When the GBSR cabinet is placed on the
MSC side, it is a remote GBSR cabinet. The local GBSR cabinet holds the GEPS or
the GTCS. The remote GBSR holds the GTCS. Zero to four GBSR cabinets can be
configured on the basis of the actual traffic volume, transmission mode on the A
Interface, and GTCS configuration mode.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 3-5

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GBSR cabinet

Parameter

Example

Source

Cabinet No.

BSC internal planning

Cabinet Type

Remote cabinet

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A

3-13

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a BSC Subrack

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure
Procedure 3-3

Adding a GBSR Cabinet

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Add BSC Cabinet from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9

Add Cabinet dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-5.

Click Finish. The GBSR cabinet is added.

Adding a BSC Subrack


The GMPS is configured by default. Configure the GEPS and the GTCS on the LMT.

Adding a GEPS on page 3-15

Adding a GTCS on page 3-18

3-14

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a BSC Subrack

Adding a GEPS
This section describes how to add a GEPS and configure its attributes on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. When the number of TRXs required by the


BSC exceeds the maximum number of TRXs supported
by a GMPS (512 TRXs) or the number of required
GEIUBs/GOIUBs exceeds the maximum number of boards
supported by a GMPS (two pairs), add a GEPS.

NOTE
The GEPS processes the basic services of the BSC. The settings of the GEPS depend
on the traffic volume of the BSC. When the BM and TC are configured in different
subracks, the BSC can be configured with up to three GEPSs to form the 1 GMPS
+ 3 GEPSs combination. This combination can hold up to 2048 TRXs. A fan box is
automatically added when you add a subrack. Configure only the attributes of the
fan box.

Prerequisites

The cabinet has the space for a new GEPS.

The OSP is already configured. For details, refer to Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points
on page 3-5.

Preparation
Table 3-6

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEPS

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack Type

GEPS

BSC internal planning

OPC

B1

Network planning

68P02909W07-A

3-15

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a BSC Subrack

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure
Procedure 3-4

Adding a GEPS

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the area where the subrack is to be added in the cabinet.

Choose Add Subrack. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10

Add Subrack dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-6.

Click Finish. The GEPS is added.

Right-click in the Fan Box area in the newly added GEPS.


Continued

3-16

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 3-4
7

Adding a BSC Subrack

Adding a GEPS (Continued)

Choose Configure Fan Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11

Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 3-11, use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The fan box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure more GEPSs.

Postrequisites
Before deleting the GEPSs that are initially configured, ensure that they are powered off.

68P02909W07-A

3-17

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a BSC Subrack

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Adding a GTCS
This section describes how to add a GTCS and configure its attributes on the LMT when the BM
and TC are configured in different subracks.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
The number of GTCSs to be configured depends on the traffic volume of the BSC.
When the BM and TC are configured in different subracks, the BSC can be configured
with up to four GTCSs to support 15360 speech channels (maximum configuration). A
fan box is automatically added when you add a subrack. Configure only the attributes
of the fan box.

Prerequisites

The cabinet has empty space to hold a GTCS.

The OSP is already configured. For details, refer to Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points
on page 3-5.

Preparation
Table 3-7

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a GTCS

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack Type

GTCS

BSC internal planning

Is Main Subrack

Selected

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-5

Adding a GTCS

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the area where the subrack is to be added in the cabinet.


Continued

3-18

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 3-5
3

Adding a BSC Subrack

Adding a GTCS (Continued)

Choose Add Subrack. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12

Add Subrack dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-7.

Click Finish. The GTCS is added.

Right-click in the Fan Box area in the newly added GTCS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-19

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a BSC Subrack

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-5
7

Adding a GTCS (Continued)

Choose Configure Fan Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13

Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 3-13, use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The fan box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure more GTCSs.

Postrequisites
To add a GTCS that was a functional GTCS configured on the MSC side (remote
GTCS), do as follows:

Reconfigure the original remote path and reset the remote GTCS.

Go to the remote GTCS side to reset the remote GTCS.

3-20

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Configuring the Power Distribution Box


This section describes how to add a power distribution box and configure its attributes on
the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
Any subrack in the cabinet can be configured as the management subrack for the
power distribution box.

Prerequisites
The subrack that manages the power distribution box is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a power
distribution box
Parameter

Example

Source

Cabinet No.

BSC internal planning

Management Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Power Box Type

Normal Power Distribution Box

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-6

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the power distribution box area.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-21

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Procedure 3-6
3

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the Power Distribution Box (Continued)

Choose Add Power Distribution Box. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14

Add Power Distribution Box dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-8.

Click Finish. A power distribution box is added.

Right-click in the power distribution box area.


Continued

3-22

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 3-6
7

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the Power Distribution Box (Continued)

Choose Configure Power Distribution Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15

Configure Power Distribution Box dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 3-15, use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The power distribution box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure power distribution boxes for more subracks.

Configuring the BSC Boards


This section describes how to add BSC boards or configure the attributes of the BSC boards.
When the BM and TC are configured in different subracks, configure the GXPUM, GDPUT,
GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GDPUX, GDPUT, GEIUA/GOIUA, GEIUT/GOIUT, GEIUB/GOIUB, and
GEPUG/GFGUG.

68P02909W07-A

3-23

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the GXPUM on page 3-24

Configuring the GXPUT on page 3-28

Configuring the GTNU on page 3-30

Configuring the GSCU on page 3-31

Configuring the GGCU on page 3-33

Configuring the GDPUX on page 3-35

Configuring the GDPUP on page 3-38

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA on page 3-41

Configuring the GEIUT/GOIUT on page 3-47

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB on page 3-51

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) on page 3-55

Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on page 3-59

Configuring the GXPUM


This section describes how to add GXPUMs in slots 0 and 1 of the GMPS/GEPS and configure
their attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

NOTE
When the GXPUM is configured in the GMPS, parameters such as Load Key and Port
Attributes can be configured. When the GXPUM is configured in the GEPS, only
Load Key can be configured.

3-24

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 3-9

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUM

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Open All Port

Selected

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a GXPUM in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-7

Configuring the GXPUM

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet where the
GMPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click slot 0 or 1 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GXPUM.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-25

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-7

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Click Finish. The GXPUM is added.

Right-click GXPUM.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-9.


Continued

3-26

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 3-7
9

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18

10

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(2)

Enable the alarm reporting function of ports according to actual requirements.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-27

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-7
11

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(3)

12

Set the parameters according to actual requirements.

13

Click Finish. The GXPUM is configured.

Configuring the GXPUT


This section describes how to add GXPUTs in slots 2 and 3 of the GMPS/GEPS and configure
their attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. Configure the GXPUT when the GMPS/GEPS is


configured with more than 256 TRXs.

Prerequisites
None.

3-28

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 3-10

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUT

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GXPUT

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a GXPUT in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-8

Configuring the GXPUT

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet where the
GMPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click slot 2 or 3 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-20.

Figure 3-20

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GXPUT.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-29

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-8

Configuring the GXPUT (Continued)

Click Finish. The GXPUT is added.

Right-click a GXPUT.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-21

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-10.

Click Finish. The GXPUT is configured.

Configuring the GTNU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GTNUs on the LMT. The GTNUs are
displayed in slots 4 and 5 of each subrack by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

3-30

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 3-11

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GTNU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-9

Configuring the GTNU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GTNU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-11.

Click Finish. The GTNU is configured.

Configuring the GSCU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GSCUs on the LMT. The GSCUs are
displayed in slots 6 and 7 of each subrack by default on the LMT.

68P02909W07-A

3-31

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 3-12

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSCU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-10

Configuring the GSCU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GSCU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-12.


Continued

3-32

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-10
4

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24

Configuring the GSCU (Continued)

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2)

Enable the alarm reporting function of ports according to actual requirements.

NOTE

Among the 12 ports on the GSCU, the alarm reporting function of all the
ports, except for ports 0, 1, 10, and 11, are disabled by default on the LMT.

Enable the alarm reporting function of the port connected to the Ethernet
cable to monitor whether the port is normal.

Click Finish. The GSCU is configured.

Configuring the GGCU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GGCUs on the LMT. The GGCUs are
displayed in slots 12 and 13 of the GMPS by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

68P02909W07-A

3-33

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Preparation
Table 3-13

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GGCU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-11

Configuring the GGCU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GGCU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key to Server.

Click Finish. The GGCU is configured.

3-34

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the GDPUX


This section describes how to add a GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS and configure its
attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS/GTCS has empty slots to hold the GDPUX.

Preparation
Table 3-14

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUX

Parameter

Example

Source

FuncType

Other board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GDPUX

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the GDPUX in the GTCS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-12

Configuring the GDPUX

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 8-13 in the GTCS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-35

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-12
3

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26

Add Board dialog box-GDPUX

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GDPUX. Then click Finish. A
GDPUX is added.

Right-click GDPUX.
Continued

3-36

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-12
6

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GDPUX

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-14.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-37

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-12
8

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-DSP TC

NOTE

When configuring the DSP TC attributes, select a DSP TC number first, and
then configure the attributes of this DSP TC.

If you select Configure All, all the DSP TCs will be configured based on the
settings of the current DSP TC displayed in the DSP TC No. drop-down
list box.

Modify the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 3-28 according to actual
requirements.

10

Click Finish. The GDPUX is configured.

Configuring the GDPUP


This section describes how to add a GDPUP in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

3-38

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GDPUP.

Preparation
Table 3-15

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GDPUP

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure a GDPUP in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-13

Configuring the GDPUP

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 8-13 in the GMPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-39

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-13
3

Configuring the GDPUP (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-29.

Figure 3-29

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GDPUP. Then click Finish. A
GDPUP is added.

Right-click GDPUP.
Continued

3-40

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-13
6

Configuring the GDPUP (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-30.

Figure 3-30

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-15.

Click Finish. The GDPUP is configured.

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA


This section describes how to add a GEIUA/GOIUA in the GTCS and configure its attributes when
the BM and TC are configured in different subracks. The GEIUA and GOIUA are responsible for
the E1 transmission and STM-1 transmission on the A Interface respectively.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GTCS has empty slots to hold the GEIUA/GOIUA.

68P02909W07-A

3-41

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Preparation
Table 3-16

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEIUA

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GEIUA

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

Table 3-17

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUA

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GOIUA

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Tributary Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The procedures for configuring the GEIUA and GOIUA are the same. The following procedure
describes how to add a pair of GOIUAs (in active/standby mode) in the GTCS.

3-42

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure
Procedure 3-14

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select the cabinet where the
GTCS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-25 in the GTCS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-31.

Figure 3-31

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to A interface board, and set Board Type to GOIUA. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 3-16.

Click Finish. A pair of GOIUAs is added.

Right-click GOIUA.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-43

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-14
7

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-32.

Figure 3-32

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GOIUA

Continued

3-44

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-14
8

Set Load Key, and click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-sub-board

Set the attributes of the sub-board of the GOIUA by referring to Table 3-16.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-45

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-14
10

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port

NOTE
TX Frame Format and RX Frame Format should be negotiated with the peer.
For other parameters, use the default settings. By default, J2 Byte Alarm Report
Switch is set to Close. Modify it according to actual requirements. The BSC
recognizes only the J2 byte alarms of the SDH suggested format. If J2 Byte Alarm
Report Switch is set to Open, Motorola recommends that the peer expected RX
J2 byte be set to the SDH suggested format.
11

Set the attributes of the port on the GOIUA by referring to Table 3-16.
Continued

3-46

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-14
12

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-APS

NOTE
Protect mode, Switch mode, and recover mode should be negotiated with the
peer. For other parameters, use the default settings.
13

Click Finish. The GOIUA is configured.

Configuring the GEIUT/GOIUT


This section describes how to add a GEIUT/GOIUT in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS and configure its
attributes when the BM and TC are configured in different subracks. The GEIUT and GOIUT
are responsible for the E1/T1 transmission and STM-1 transmission between the GMPS/GEPS
and the GTCS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

3-47

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS/GTCS has empty slots to hold the GEIUT/GOIUT.

NOTE
If the GEIUT/GOIUT in independent mode is configured in the GTCS, the
corresponding active/standby slot cannot be configured with any board.

Preparation
Table 3-18

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUT

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GEIUT

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

Table 3-19

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUT

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GOIUT

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Tributary Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The procedures for configuring the GEIUT and GOIUT are the same. The following procedure
describes how to add a pair of GEIUTs (in active/standby mode) in the GTCS.

3-48

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure
Procedure 3-15

Configuring the GEIUT/GOIUT

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select the cabinet where the
GTCS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 14-17 in the GTCS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Ater interface board, and set Board Type to GEIUT. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 3-18.

Click Finish. A pair of GEIUTs is added.

Right-click GEIUT.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-49

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-15
7

Configuring the GEIUT/GOIUT (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEIUT

Continued

3-50

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-15
8

Configuring the GEIUT/GOIUT (Continued)

Set Load Key, and click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port

Set the attributes of the port on the GEIUT by referring to Table 3-18.

10

Click Finish. The GEIUT is configured.

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB


This section describes how to add a GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its
attributes. The GEIUB and GOIUB provide the E1 transmission and STM-1 transmission on the
Abis interface respectively.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GEIUB/GOIUB.

68P02909W07-A

3-51

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Preparation
Table 3-20

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GEIUB

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Table 3-21

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GOIUB

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Tributary Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT


(character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The procedures for configuring the GEIUB and GOIUB are the same. The following procedure
describes how to add a pair of GEIUBs (in active/standby mode) in the GMPS.

3-52

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure
Procedure 3-16

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-27 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Abis interface board, and set Board Type to GEIUB. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 3-20.

Click Finish. A GEIUB is added.

Right-click GEIUB.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-53

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-16
7

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Continued

3-54

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-16
8

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Set Load Key, and click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2)

NOTE

When configuring the port attributes of the GEIUB, select a port number
first, and configure the attributes of this port.

If you select Configure All, all the ports will be configured based on the
settings of the current port displayed in the Port No. drop-down list box.

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 3-41, use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.

10

Click Finish. The GEIUB is configured.

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)


This section describes how to add a GEPUG in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEPUG is responsible for the FR transmission on the Gb interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The GEPUG is configured when the Gb interface


uses the FR transmission mode.

68P02909W07-A

3-55

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GEPUG.

Preparation
Table 3-22

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

14

BSC internal planning

FuncType

Gb interface board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GEPUG

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

Negotiation with the peer

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Frame Format

CRC4_MULTIFRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The following procedure describes how to configure a pair of GEPUGs (in active/standby
mode) in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-17

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select the cabinet where the
GMPS/GEPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 14-15 in the GMPS.


Continued

3-56

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-17
3

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Gb interface board, and set Board Type to GEPUG. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 3-22. Click Finish. A pair of GEPUGs is added.

Right-click GEPUG.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-57

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-17
6

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEPUG

Continued

3-58

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 3-17
7

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-22, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port

Set Frame Format by referring to Table 3-22. For other parameters in the dialog box shown
in Figure 3-44, use the default settings or modify them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The GEPUG is configured.

Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP)


This section describes how to add a GFGUG in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEPUG is responsible for the IP transmission on the Gb interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The GFGUG is configured when the Gb interface


uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GFGUG.

68P02909W07-A

3-59

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Preparation
Table 3-23

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

FuncType

Gb interface board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GFGUG

BSC internal planning

Net Mode

Independent Mode

BSC internal planning

Port Type

FE

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Port Active Status

ACTIVE

BSC internal planning

Logical IP Address

192.168.70.2

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.70.132

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Destination IP Address

192.168.80.0

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Gateway

192.168.70.136

Negotiation with the peer

Device IP

Port IP

BSC Router

The following procedure describes how to configure a GFGUG in the GMPS.

Procedure

Adding a board
a.

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet
number from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

b.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-27 in the GMPS.

3-60

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-45

Configuring the BSC Boards

Add Board dialog box

d.

Set FuncType to Gb interface board, and set Board Type to GFGUG. Set the
parameters by referring to Table 3-23.

e.

Click Finish. The GFGUG is added.

Configure the board attributes.


a.

Right-click GFGUG.

b.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-46.

68P02909W07-A

3-61

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Figure 3-46

c.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUG

Set Load Key by referring to Table 3-23, and then click Next. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port

3-62

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

d.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Set the attributes of the Ethernet port by referring to Table 3-23.

NOTE
When the attribute of a port on the GFGUG is modified, the port becomes
faulty temporarily. If the board is in active/standby mode, an active/standby
switchover is performed automatically.

e.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48

f.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos

Set the QoS attributes according to actual requirements, and then click Next. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-49.

68P02909W07-A

3-63

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Figure 3-49

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection

g.

Set the physical link detection parameters according to actual requirements.

h.

Click Finish. The GFGUG attributes are configured.

3-64

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure the device IP address.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure Device IP from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50

b.

Configure Device IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-51.

68P02909W07-A

3-65

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Figure 3-51

c.

Add Device IP dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-23. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 3-50.

NOTE
Device IP address is the logical IP address for communication. This IP
address is valid for the IP addresses of all the ports of the board. The device
IP addresses for the interface boards operating in active/standby mode
are the same. The IP addresses for the interface boards not operating in
active/standby mode should not be arranged in the same network segment.

d.

Click Finish. The device IP address is configured.

3-66

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure the IP address of the Ethernet port.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure Ethernet Port IP from the shortcut menu.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-52

Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box

68P02909W07-A

3-67

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

b.

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53

c.

Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-23. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 3-52.

NOTE
If Port Type is set to FE, one board can be configured with eight port
IP addresses on different network segments. If Port Type is set to GE,
one board can be configured with two port IP addresses on different
network segments. The port IP address and the device IP address must
be configured on different network segments. The port IP addresses for
the active and standby GFGUGs must be configured on the same network
segment.

d.

Click Finish. The port IP address is configured.

3-68

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure the BSC router.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure BSC Router from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-54

Configure BSC Router dialog box

68P02909W07-A

3-69

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

b.

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-55

c.

Add BSC Router dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-23.

CAUTION
Destination IP Address must be set to the network address, and it cannot
be configured on the same network segment with the port IP address of
the GFGUG. Otherwise, Destination IP Address is invalid. Gateway IP
Address and the port IP address of the GFGUG must be configured on
the same network segment.
d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-54.

e.

Click Finish. The BSC router is configured.

3-70

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC EAC

Configuring the BSC EAC


This section describes how to configure the EAC for the BSC cabinet. The EAC gathers Boolean
values, analog values, and alarm threshold information and reports them to the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The EAC should be configured when the BSC


needs to collect external alarm information.

NOTE
One BSC cabinet can be configured with only one EAC.

Prerequisites
The subrack that holds the EAC is configured.

Preparation
None.

Procedure
Procedure 3-18
1

Configuring the BSC EAC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of a subrack.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-71

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC EAC

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-18
2

Configuring the BSC EAC (Continued)

Choose Configure BSC EAC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56

Add BSC EAC dialog box-switch

NOTE
Use the default settings of the parameters or modify them according to actual
requirements.
Continued

3-72

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Procedure 3-18
3

Configuring the BSC EAC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-57.

Figure 3-57

Add BSC EAC dialog box-analog and alarm threshold

NOTE
Use the default settings of the parameters or modify them according to actual
requirements.
4

Click Finish. The BSC EAC is configured.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link


This section describes how to configure the communication links between the GMPS and the
GEPS, between GEPSs, or between GTCSs. The links are responsible for the TDM switching
between subracks.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

3-73

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

NOTE

A maximum of three subrack communication links can be configured between


two subracks. In actual situations, an active and a standby communication
links are configured between subracks.

The communication between subracks is achieved through the GTNU in each


subrack. There are six external ports, numbered TDM0TDM5, on the panel of
the GTNU. Only one subrack communication link can use each port.

Prerequisites
Configure the two subracks between which the communication link is to be established.

Preparation

NOTE
Assume that the BSC is configured with one GMPS, two GEPSs, and two GTCSs. The
GMPS is subrack 0, GEPSs are subracks 1 and 3, and GTCSs are subracks 6 and 7.

Table 3-24 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Table 3-25 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

3-74

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Table 3-26 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Table 3-27 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GTCS 6 and GTCS 7
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the mesh interconnection between subracks
through TDM ports.

Procedure

Configure the communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

68P02909W07-A

3-75

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

b.

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-58.

Figure 3-58

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

3-76

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-59.

Figure 3-59

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-24.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GMPS 0 and GEPS 1.

68P02909W07-A

3-77

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configure the communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-60

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

3-78

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-61.

Figure 3-61

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-24.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GMPS 0 and GEPS 3.

68P02909W07-A

3-79

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configure the communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-62.

Figure 3-62

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

3-80

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-63.

Figure 3-63

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-26.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GEPS 1 and GEPS 3.

Configure the communication link between GTCS 6 and GTCS 7.

68P02909W07-A

3-81

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-64.

Figure 3-64

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

3-82

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-65

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-27.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GTCS 6 and GTCS 7 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GTCS 6 and GTCS 7.

68P02909W07-A

3-83

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Links (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the BSC Links (BM/TC Separated)

This section describes how to configure the BSC links on the Ater Interface , A Interface and Gb
Interface when the BM and TC are configured in different subracks. These links are responsible
for the signaling transmission within the BSC and between the BSC and other NEs. BSC links
are the links on the Ater interface, A Interface, and Gb interface.

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface


This section describes how to configure links on the Ater interface. These links are responsible
for the signaling transmission between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS. If the GTCS is configured
on the BSC side, the Ater connection path must be configured. If the GTCS is configured on the
MSC side, the Ater connection path, Ater OML, and Ater signaling link must be configured.

Configuring the Ater Connection Path on page 3-84

Adding an Ater OML on page 3-87

Adding an Ater Signaling Link on page 3-91

Adding an A Interface E1/T1 on page 3-94

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link on page 3-97

Configuring the NSE on page 3-101

Configuring the BC on page 3-103

Configuring the SGSN Clock on page 3-106

Configuring the NSVC on page 3-108

Configuring the PTPBVC on page 3-111

Configuring the Ater Connection Path


This section describes how to configure a connection path between the GTCS and the
GMPS/GEPS on the Ater interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

CAUTION
If the GTCS is configured on the MSC side, an Ater connection path should be
established between the GMPS/GEPS and the main GTCS. The Ater connection path is
established between GEIUTs or between GOIUTs. Specify different ports to configure
more than one Ater connection path between interface boards. A maximum of 32 Ater
connection paths can be configured between GEIUTs/GOIUTs.

3-84

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Prerequisites

The subracks between which the Ater connection path is to be established, are configured
and the GMPS or the GEPS is configured with the subrack-OSP mapping. For changes in
the document, refer to Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping on page 3-11.

The GEIUT/GOIUT in the two subracks between which the Ater connection path is to
be established, is configured. For changes in the document, refer to Configuring the
GEIUT/GOIUT on page 3-47.

Preparation
Table 3-28 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Ater
connection path between the GMPS and the GTCS
Parameter

Example

Source

BM Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

BM Slot No.

16

BSC internal planning

BM Port No.

BSC internal planning

TC Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

TC Slot No.

16

BSC internal planning

TC Port No.

BSC internal planning

Table 3-29 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Ater
connection path between the GEPS and the GTCS
Parameter

Example

Source

BM Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

BM Slot No.

16

BSC internal planning

BM Port No.

BSC internal planning

TC Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

TC Slot No.

16

BSC internal planning

TC Port No.

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the Ater connection path between the
GMPS and the GTCS. On the LMT, the GMPS and the GEPS are collectively known as the BM
subrack. They are identified by different subrack numbers.

68P02909W07-A

3-85

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure
Procedure 3-19

Configuring the Ater Connection Path

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUT in the GMPS.

Choose Configure Ater Connection Path from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-66.

Figure 3-66

Configuring the Ater connection path

Continued

3-86

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Procedure 3-19
3

Configuring the Ater Connection Path (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-67.

Figure 3-67

Adding an Ater connection path

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-28.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-66.

Click Finish. The Ater connection path between the GMPS and the GTCS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 6 to add more Ater connection paths between the GMPS and
the GTCS.

Adding an Ater OML


This section describes how to add an Ater OML. When the GTCS is configured on the MSC side,
add an Ater OML between the GMPS and the main GTCS. The Ater OML transmits the OM
information to the GTCS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Ater OML should be configured when the


GTCS is placed on the MSC side.

68P02909W07-A

3-87

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

CAUTION

In general, an active and a standby Ater OMLs should be configured.

The timeslot mask of an Ater OML must contain TS1. By default, TS1 is selected
on the LMT. Except TS1, at least four consecutive timeslots must be selected.

Prerequisites

The GTCS is configured on the MSC side.

The Ater connection path between the GMPS and the main GTCS is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-30

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an OML

Parameter

Example

Source

Ater Connection Path Index

BSC internal planning

BM Subrack No. of Ater Connection Path

BSC internal planning

Timeslot Mask

TS1, TS2TS17

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-20

Adding an Ater OML

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUT in the GMPS.


Continued

3-88

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Procedure 3-20
2

Adding an Ater OML (Continued)

Choose Add Ater OML from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 3-68.

Figure 3-68

Configuring the Ater OML

Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-89

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Procedure 3-20
3

Adding an Ater OML (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-69.

Figure 3-69

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Adding an Ater OML

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-30.

NOTE
By default, TS1 is configured. Configure TS2TS17 by referring to Table 3-30.

When the total number of the GMPSs and GEPSs is not greater than two,
you can select timeslots TS1T17.

When the total number of the GMPSs and GEPSs exceeds two, you can select
timeslots TS1TS31.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-68.

Click Finish. The Ater OML is added.

Postrequisites
If the bandwidth of the Ater OML is modified during the loading of the interface
board in the remote subrack, the load path is disrupted. The interface board will
be reset after five minutes of loading attempts.

3-90

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

If you delete all the Ater OMLs, it is possible that the assignment is successful but there is no
speech when you make a call. This problem disappears after you configure the Ater OMLs again.

Adding an Ater Signaling Link


This section describes how to add an Ater signaling link. When the GTCS is configured on the
MSC side, the Ater connection path between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS must be configured
with an Ater signaling link. The Ater signaling link transmits the signaling of service control, TC
resource management, and Ater transmission resource management.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Ater OML should be configured when the


GTCS is placed on the MSC side.

NOTE

The data rate of the Ater signaling link is 64 kbit/s.

A maximum of eight Ater signaling links can be configured for the GMPS or the
GEPS where the Ater connection path is located.

Prerequisites

The GTCS is configured on the MSC side.

The Ater connection path between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS is configured. For
details, refer to Configuring the Ater Connection Path on page 3-84.

Preparation
Table 3-31
link

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an Ater signaling

Parameter

Example

Source

Ater Connection Path Index

BSC internal planning

BM Subrack No. of Ater Connection


Path

BSC internal planning

Timeslot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Transfer Mode

Terrestrial Transmission

Negotiation with the peer

Congestion Start Threshold

90

BSC internal planning

Congestion End Threshold

60

BSC internal planning

Window Size

16

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A

3-91

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the Ater Interface

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure
Procedure 3-21

Adding an Ater Signaling Link

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUT in the GTCS.

Choose Add Ater Signaling Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 3-70.

Figure 3-70

Configuring the Ater signaling link

Continued

3-92

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 3-21
3

Adding an Ater Signaling Link (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-71.

Figure 3-71

Adding an Ater signaling link

NOTE
One 64 kbit/s Ater signaling link can be configured with only one timeslot. In
addition, the Timeslot Mask of the Ater signaling link cannot be TS1.
4

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-31.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-70.

Click Finish. The Ater signaling link is added.

Configuring Links on the A Interface


This section describes how to configure E1/T1 connections and SS7 signaling links on the A
Interface when the BM and TC are configured in different subracks. These E1/T1 connections
and SS7 signaling links are responsible for the communication between the BSC and the MSC.

68P02909W07-A

3-93

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Adding an A Interface E1/T1


This section describes how to configure the connection on the A Interface to establish a path
between the BSC and the MSC when the BM and TC are configured in different subracks.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GEIUA/GOIUA in the GTCS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the
GEIUA/GOIUA on page 3-41.

Preparation
Table 3-32 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an A
Interface E1/T1
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

20

BSC internal planning

Port Number

Negotiation with the peer

Start CIC

Negotiation with the peer

DSP Group No.

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 3-22

Adding an A Interface E1/T1

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUA in the GTCS.


Continued

3-94

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 3-22
2

Adding an A Interface E1/T1 (Continued)

Choose Configure A Interface E1/T1 from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-72.

Figure 3-72

Configure A Interface E1/T1 dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-95

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 3-22
3

Adding an A Interface E1/T1 (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-73.

Figure 3-73

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Adding an A interface E1/T1

On the A Interface E1/T1 Attributes tab page, set the parameters by referring to
Table 3-32.

NOTE
One CIC group contains 32 CICs. If multiple E1s/T1s have the same OSP and the
same DSP group, the start CIC for each E1/T1 must be unique. If the start CIC of
the first E1/T1 is 0, then the start CIC of the second E1/T1 and that of the first
E1/T1 must be in different groups, and the start CIC of the second E1/T1 must
be greater than 31. On the CIC Attributes tab page, use the default settings or
modify them according to actual requirements.
5

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-72.

Click Finish. The A interface E1/T1 is added.

Repeat step 1 through step 6 to add more E1/T1 connections on the A interface.

3-96

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link


This section describes how to add an SS7 signaling link on the A Interface. This link is
responsible for the signaling transmission between the BSC and the MSC.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The SS7 DSP is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points on
page 3-5.

The GXPUM is configured in the GMPS or GEPS that is connected to the GTCS. The Ater
connection path is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GXPUM on page 3-24
and Configuring the Ater Connection Path on page 3-84.

The A Interface E1/T1 is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-33
link

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an SS7 signaling

Parameter

Example

Source

Ater Connection Path

BSC internal planning

BM Subrack No. of Ater Connection Path

BSC internal planning

Rate Type

64 kbit/s

Negotiation with the peer

A Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

A Slot No.

20

BSC internal planning

A Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Ater Timeslot Mask

TS19

BSC internal planning

A Interface Timeslot Mask

TS16

Negotiation with the peer

SLC

Negotiation with the peer

SLC Send

Negotiation with the peer

The following procedure provides an example of configuring a 64 kbit/s SS7 signaling link
on the GEIUA in the GTCS.

68P02909W07-A

3-97

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure
Procedure 3-23

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUA in the GTCS.

Choose Configure SS7 Signaling Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-74.

Figure 3-74

Configure SS7 Signaling Link dialog box

Continued

3-98

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 3-23
3

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-75.

Figure 3-75

Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP2)

NOTE
In BM/TC separated mode, if the GTCS is configured on the MSC side, do not
set Ater Timeslot Mask to TS1 for the SS7 signaling link configured in the
main GTCS.
4

On the MPT2 tab page, set the parameters by referring to Table 3-33.

NOTE
The number of timeslots on the A interface must be the same as that on the Ater
interface.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-99

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-23
5

Chapter

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link (Continued)

Click the MTP3 tab, the tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-76.

Figure 3-76

Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP3)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-33.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-74.

Click Finish. The SS7 Signaling links are added.

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission


Mode on the Gb Interface)
This section describes how to configure the NSE, BC, SGSN Clock, NSVC, and PTPBVC on the
Gb interface for the FR transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.

3-100

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Configuring the NSE


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Entity (NSE) on the Gb interface
and determine the subnetwork protocol type.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

When adding an NSE, set the NSE identifier, subnetwork protocol type, and
agent subrack number.

One BSC can be configured with a maximum of 128 NSEs. Multiple NSEs can be
assigned on the same agent subrack.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 3-34 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over FR

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-24

Configuring the NSE

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-101

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-24
2

Chapter

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure NSE from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-77.

Figure 3-77

Configure NSE dialog box

Continued

3-102

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-24
3

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-78.

Figure 3-78

Add NSE dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-34. Click OK to return to the dialog box shown
in Figure 3-77.

Click Finish. The NSE is configured.

Configuring the BC
This section describes how to configure the bearer channel (BC) on the Gb interface when the
Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode. The BC is responsible for the data transmission
between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The BC is configured only when the Gb interface


uses the FR transmission mode.

NOTE
BC refers to a fixed number of timeslots on the E1/T1 when the Gb interface uses the
FR transmission mode.

68P02909W07-A

3-103

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

Preparation
Table 3-35 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on
the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Frame Relay Protocol Type

Q933

Negotiation with the peer

Occupied Timeslot

T1-T16

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N391)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N392)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N393)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (T391)

10

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 3-25

Configuring the BC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

3-104

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-25
2

Configuring the BC (Continued)

Choose Configure BC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 3-79.

Figure 3-79

Configure BC dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-105

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-25
3

Chapter

Configuring the BC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-80.

Figure 3-80

Add BC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-35.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-79.

Click Finish. The BC is configured.

Configuring the SGSN Clock


This section describes how to configure the SGSN clock when the Gb interface uses the FR
transmission mode. The SGSN clock is responsible for the synchronization between the GEPUG
and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The SGSN clock is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the FR transmission mode.

3-106

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

NOTE
The clock signal on the SGSN side is carried by the BC. Configure the SGSN clock by
specifying the port of the BC.

Prerequisites

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

The BC is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the BC on page 3-103.

Preparation
Table 3-36
clock

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-26

Configuring the SGSN Clock

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-107

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-26
2

Chapter

Configuring the SGSN Clock (Continued)

Choose Config SGSN Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-81.

Figure 3-81

Configure SGSN Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-36.

Click Add. The SGSN clock is configured.

Configuring the NSVC


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Virtual Connection (NSVC) for
service transmission on the Gb interface when the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode.
The NSVC and the BC are bound together to provide the data transmission between the BSC
and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The NSVC is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the FR transmission mode.

3-108

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

NOTE

NSVC refers to the virtual connection on the NS layer. One NSVC is located on
the BC of one E1/T1 and belongs to one BC/NSE. One BC/NSE can be configured
with multiple NSVCs.

One NSVC corresponds to one PVC. When configuring an NSVC, specify the
corresponding PVC.

Prerequisites

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-101.

The BC is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-37 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSVC Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port Number

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Data Link Connection Identifier

16

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 3-27

Configuring the NSVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-109

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-27
2

Chapter

Configuring the NSVC (Continued)

Choose Configure NSVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-82.

Figure 3-82

Configure NSVC dialog box

Continued

3-110

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-27
3

Configuring the NSVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-83.

Figure 3-83

Add NSVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-37.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-82.

Click Finish. The NSVC on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the PTPBVC


This section describes how to configure the PTPBVC on the Gb interface to bind the GPRS cell
with the NSE.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
One GPRS cell can be configured with only one PTPBVC. One NSE can be configured
with multiple PTPBVCs.

68P02909W07-A

3-111

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-101.

A GPRS cell is configured and the activity state of the cell is Activated.

Preparation
Table 3-38 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-28

Configuring the PTPBVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

3-112

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-28
2

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure PTPBVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-84.

Figure 3-84

Configure PTBBVC dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-113

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-28
3

Chapter

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-85.

Figure 3-85

Add PTPBVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-38.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-84..

Click Finish. The PTPBVC is configured.

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission


Mode on the Gb Interface)
This section describes how to configure the NSE, local NSVL, remote NSVL, and PTPBVC on the
Gb interface for the IP transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.

Configuring the NSE on page 3-115

Configuring the Local NSVL on page 3-117

Configuring the Remote NSVL on page 3-120

Configuring the PTPBVC on page 3-122

3-114

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Configuring the NSE


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Entity (NSE) on the Gb interface
and determine the subnetwork protocol type.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

When adding an NSE, set the NSE identifier, subnetwork protocol type, and
agent subrack number.

One BSC can be configured with a maximum of 128 NSEs. Multiple NSEs can
be assigned on the same agent subrack.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 3-39 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over IP

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-29

Configuring the NSE

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-115

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-29
2

Chapter

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure NSE from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-86.

Figure 3-86

Configure NSE dialog box

Continued

3-116

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-29
3

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-87.

Figure 3-87

Add NSE dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-39.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-86.

Click Finish. The NSE is configured.

Configuring the Local NSVL


This section describes how to configure the local NSVL (NSVL on the BSC side) on the Gb
interface when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode. The local NSVL is responsible
for the data transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Local NSVL is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GFGUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on
page 3-59.

68P02909W07-A

3-117

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter

Preparation
Table 3-40 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Local NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the peer

UDP Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

PIU Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

PIU Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 3-30

Configuring the Local NSVL

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GFGUG.


Continued

3-118

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-30
2

Configuring the Local NSVL (Continued)

Choose Configure Local NSVL from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 3-88.

Figure 3-88

Configure Local NSVL dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-119

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-30
3

Chapter

Configuring the Local NSVL (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-89.

Figure 3-89

Add Local NSVL dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-40.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-88.

Click Finish. The local NSVL on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the Remote NSVL


This section describes how to configure the remote NSVL (NSVL on the SGSN side) on the Gb
interface when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode. The remote NSVL is responsible
for the data transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Remote NSVL is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GFGUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on
page 3-59.

3-120

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Preparation
Table 3-41 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Remote NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.80.1

Negotiation with the peer

IP Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 3-31

Configuring the Remote NSVL

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure Remote NSVL from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-90.

Figure 3-90

Configure Remote NSVL dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-121

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-31
3

Chapter

Configuring the Remote NSVL (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-91.

Figure 3-91

Add Remote NSVL dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-41.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-90.

Click Finish. The remote NSVL on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the PTPBVC


This section describes how to configure the PTPBVC on the Gb interface to bind the GPRS cell
with the NSE.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
One GPRS cell can be configured with only one PTPBVC. One NSE can be configured
with multiple PTPBVCs.

3-122

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-115.

A GPRS cell is configured and the activity state of the cell is Activated.

Preparation
Table 3-42 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-32

Configuring the PTPBVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-123

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Procedure 3-32
2

Chapter

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure PTPBVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-92.

Figure 3-92

Configure PTPBVC dialog box

Continued

3-124

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 3-32
3

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-93.

Figure 3-93

Add PTPBVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-42.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 3-92.

Click Finish. The PTPBVC is configured.

68P02909W07-A

3-125

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Clock (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the BSC Clock (BM/TC Separated)

This section describes how to configure BSC clock signals when the BM and TC are configured
in different subracks. The BSC clock signals are responsible for the synchronization of boards in
each subrack.

Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS


The MSC provides the line clock of the BSC. When the BM and TC are configured in different
subracks, each GTCS extracts the link clock from the A Interface and uses the link clock as
its reference clock.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

Each GTCS must be configured with a line clock signal.

If the GEIUA is configured in the GTCS, two line clock signals, line 0 and line
1, can be configured on the A Interface E1/T1 of the GTCS. If the GOIUA is
configured in the GTCS, only one line clock signal can be configured for each
GOIUA and the line clock signal must be configured on port 0 on the GOIUA.

Prerequisites

The GEIUA/GOIUA in the GTCS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the
GEIUA/GOIUA on page 3-41.

If the line clock is to be configured on the GEIUA, an A Interface E1/T1 in the GTCS
must be configured. For changes in the document, refer to Adding an A Interface E1/T1
on page 3-94.

3-126

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS

Preparation
Table 3-43 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock
on line 0 for the GTCS
Parameter

Example

Source

Line No.

LINE0

BSC internal planning

Line Clock Type

8K

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

20

BSC internal planning

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Backup Port No.

BSC internal planning

Table 3-44 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock
on line 1 for the GTCS
Parameter

Example

Source

Line No.

LINE1

BSC internal planning

Line Clock Type

8K

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

20

BSC internal planning

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Backup Port No.

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure two line clock signals on the GEIUA in
the GTCS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-33
1

Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GTCS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

3-127

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS

Procedure 3-33
2

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS (Continued)

Choose Configure Line Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-94.

Figure 3-94

Configuring the clock on line 0

NOTE
When the A interface E1 where the port of the selected Board Port No. is located
incurs a fault, the GTCS cannot extract the line clock from the A interface. In this
case, the GTCS can extract the line clock from the A interface through the A
interface E1 where the port of the selected Backup Port No. is located.

Board Slot No.: Number of the slot where the GEIUA/GOIUA configured
with the A interface E1 is located.

Board Port No.: Number of the port connected to one A interface E1 on


the GEIUA/GOIUA.

Backup Port No.: Number of the port connected to another A interface


E1 on the GEIUA.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-43.

Click Add. The clock on LINE0 for the GTCS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 2 to open the configuration dialog box.


Continued

3-128

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GTCS

Procedure 3-33
6

Configuring the Line Clock for the GTCS (Continued)

Select LINE1 and set the parameters by referring to Table 3-44, as shown in Figure 3-95.

Figure 3-95

Configuring the clock on line 1

Click Add. The clock on LINE1 for the GTCS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 7 to configure the line clock for each GTCS.

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GTCS


This section describes how to configure the 8K reference clock for the GTCS. Each GTCS
extracts the line clock from the A Interface and uses the line clock as its reference clock. The
GEIUA/GOIUA processes the line clock and generates an 8 kHz clock signal, which is used
as the synchronization clock for the GTCS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GTCS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on page
3-31.

The line clock in the GTCS is configured.

68P02909W07-A

3-129

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GTCS

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Preparation
Table 3-45 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K
reference clock for the GTCS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

LINE CLOCK

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-34

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GTCS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GTCS.

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-96.

Figure 3-96

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-45.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GTCS is configured.

3-130

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS


This section describes how to configure the line clock for the GMPS. The GMPS extracts the
line clock from the GTCS through the Ater interface. This line clock is used as the input clock
for the GGCU in the GMPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
On the GEIUT, up to two line clock signals can be configured on the Ater connection
paths of the GMPS. One line clock corresponds to one Ater connection path. On the
GEIUT, only one line clock can be configured on port 0 of the GOIUT.

Prerequisites

The GEIUT/GOIUT in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the
GEIUT/GOIUT on page 3-47.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

If the line clock is to be configured on the GEIUT, the Ater connection path in the
GMPS must be configured. For changes in the document, refer to Configuring the Ater
Connection Path on page 3-84.

Preparation
Table 3-46 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock
on line 0 for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

Line No.

LINE0

BSC internal planning

Line Clock Type

8K

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

16

BSC internal planning

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Backup Port No.

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A

3-131

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Table 3-47 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock
on line 1 for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

Line No.

LINE1

BSC internal planning

Line Clock Type

8K

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

16

BSC internal planning

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Backup Port No.

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure two line clock signals on the GEIUT in
the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 3-35

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GMPS.

Choose Configure Line Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-97.

Figure 3-97

Configuring the clock on line 0 for the GMPS

Continued

3-132

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

Procedure 3-35

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS (Continued)

NOTE
If the Ater connection path, where the port of the selected Board Port No. is
located, incurs a fault, the GMPS cannot extract the line clock from the Ater
interface. In this case, the GMPS can extract the line clock from the Ater interface
through the Ater connection path where the port of the selected Backup Port
No. is located.

Board Slot No.: Number of the slot where the GEIUT/GOIUT configured
with the Ater connection path is located.

Board Port No.: Number of the port connected to one Ater connection
path on the GEIUT/GOIUT.

Backup Port No.: Number of the port connected to another Ater connection
path on the GEIUT.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-46.

Click Add. The clock on LINE0 for the GMPS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 2 to open the configuration dialog box.

Select LINE1 and set the parameters by referring to Table 3-47, as shown in Figure 3-98.

Figure 3-98

Configuring the clock on line 1 for the GMPS

Click Add. The clock on LINE1 for the GMPS is configured.

68P02909W07-A

3-133

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the System Clock

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the System Clock


This section describes how to configure the system clock, that is, the input clock for the GGCU.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
The clock for the GGCU can be the BITS clock or the line clock extracted by the
GEIUT/GOIUT from the GTCS connected. The GGCU processes the input clock and
generates the 8 kHz clock, which is used as the transmission synchronization clock
and the time synchronization clock for the boards in the GMPS or GEPS.

The BITS clock is of two types: 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s.

The system clock has four priorities: priority 1 to priority 4, from the highest
to the lowest.

When the BITS clock is provided, it should be configured as the system clock
and enjoys the highest priority.

Prerequisites

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The BITS clock is ready, or the line clock for the GMPS is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-48
clock

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system

Parameter

Example

Source

Priority

BSC internal planning

BSC internal planning

BSC internal planning

2M external clock 0

BSC internal planning

LINE0

BSC internal planning

LINE1

BSC internal planning

2 MHz

BSC internal planning

8 kHz

BSC internal planning

8 kHz

BSC internal planning

Source Type

Source Sub-type

3-134

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the System Clock

Procedure
Procedure 3-36

Configuring the System Clock

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure System Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 3-99.

Figure 3-99

Configure System Clock dialog box

CAUTION
Source Type and Work Mode cannot be configured in one operation. Configure
them separately. After configuring Source Type, exit the configuration wizard,
and then start the configuration wizard again to configure Work Mode.
3

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-48.

Click Finish. The system clock is configured.

68P02909W07-A

3-135

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS


This section describes how to configure the 8 kHz clock provided by the backplane of the GGCU
as the 8K reference clock for the GMPS. The 8K reference clock serves as the synchronization
clock for the boards in the GMPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on
page 3-31.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The system clock is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-49 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference
clock for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

GGCU Backplane

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-37
1

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GMPS.


Continued

3-136

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 3-37
2

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS (Continued)

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-100.

Figure 3-100

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-49.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GMPS is configured.

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS


This section describes how to configure the 8 kHz clock provided by the GGCU as the 8K
reference clock for the GEPS. The 8K reference clock serves as the synchronization clock
for the boards in the GEPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

3-137

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GEPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on page
3-31.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The system clock is configured.

Preparation
Table 3-50 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K
reference clock for the GEPS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

GGCU Panel

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 3-38
1

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GEPS.


Continued

3-138

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 3-38
2

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS (Continued)

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-101.

Figure 3-101

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 3-50.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GEPS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 4 to configure the 8K reference clock for more GEPSs.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

3-139

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Chapter 3: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Separated)

3-140

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

4
Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

4-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

This section describes how to configure the BSC global data, devices, links, and clock on the
BSC Local Manager when the BM and TC are configured in same subracks.

4-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the BSC Global Data (BM/TC Combined)

When the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack, the BSC global data includes BSC
attributes, SS7 signaling point data, and subrack-OSP mapping.

Configuring the BSC Attributes


This section describes how to configure BSC attributes. In the initial configuration of BSC
attributes, configure only the basic attributes. For other attributes, use the default settings.
The BSC attributes include:

Basic Data

Flow Control Data

BSC Timer

Software Parameters

User Resource Binding

SCCP

NSS and BSSGP

MSC Pool Parameters

Null-NRI and DPC Route

Trigger Saving Power Function

IP Transfers

Abis Congestion Control

Single Pass Exclude MSISDN Number

Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The BSC attributes have been determined in network planning.

68P02909W07-A

4-3

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Attributes

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Preparation
Table 4-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes
(BM/TC combined)
Parameter

Example

Source

BSC Name

BSC001

Network planning

Country Code

86

Network planning

City Code

021

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Um Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Abis Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

NTP Server

10.161.72.251

Negotiation with the OMC-S/T

BSC Subrack Combination


Type

BM/TC Together

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-1
1

Configuring the BSC Attributes

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

4-4

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Procedure 4-1
2

Choose Configure BSC Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1

Configuring the BSC Attributes (Continued)

Configure BSC Attributes dialog box

On the Basic Data tab page, set the parameters by referring to Table 4-1.

NOTE
The parameters not listed in Table 4-1 are optional. Retain their default settings
or modify them according to actual requirements.
4

Click Finish. The BSC attributes are configured.

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points


This section describes how to configure SS7 signaling points. Configure the Originating
Signaling Point (OSP) and the Destination Signaling Point (DSP). If there is no direct physical
link between the OSP and the DSP, configure Signaling Transfer Points (STPs).
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

4-5

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

CAUTION

The OSP must be configured before the DSP is configured.

The OSP and DSP must be configured before the STP is configured.

The names and codes of signaling points must be unique.

The BSC can be configured with up to four OSPs, 32 DSPs, and 32 STPs. For
details on the configuration of multiple OSPs, refer to Local multiple signaling
points.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 4-2
and DSP

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SS7 OSP

Parameter

Example

Source

OPC Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Encoding Scheme

14

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

DPC Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DPC (Hex)

D1

Network planning

Table 4-3

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the STP

Parameter

Example

Source

STP Name

STPMSC001

BSC internal planning

STP (Hex)

C1

Network planning

Signaling point protocol

ITU-T

Network planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the SS7 Signaling Points

Procedure

Configure the OSP.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure SS7 Signaling Point from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.

4-6

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 4-2

c.

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (1)

On the OPC tab page, click Add OPC. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3

Add OPC dialog box

68P02909W07-A

4-7

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

NOTE
If an OPC exists, OPC Name, Encoding Scheme, and Network Indicator
of the OSP are displayed by default in the dialog box shown in Figure 4-3.

d.

Set the parameters of the OSP by referring to Table 4-2.

e.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-2.

Configure the DSP.


a.

In the dialog box shown in Figure 4-2, click the DPC tab to display the tab page,
as shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4

b.

Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (2)

Click Add DPC. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.

4-8

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Figure 4-5

Add DPC dialog box

NOTE
If there is no direct physical link between the OSP and the DSP, configure
STPs. In the dialog box shown in Figure 4-5, set Using STP to Yes.

c.

Set the parameters of the DSP by referring to Table 4-2.

d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-2.

Check whether there is a direct physical link between the OSP and the DSP.
Then...

If...
There is a direct physical link between the OSP and
the DSP

The task is complete.

There is no direct physical link between the OSP


and the DSP

Go to Step Configure the STP.

Configure the STP.


a.

In the dialog box shown in Figure 4-2, click the STP tab to display the tab page,
as shown in Figure 4-6.

68P02909W07-A

4-9

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points

Figure 4-6

b.

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configure SS7 Signaling Point dialog box (3)

Click Add STP. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7

Add STP dialog box

4-10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

c.

Set the parameters of the STP by referring to Table 4-3.

d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-2.

Click Finish. The SS7 signaling points are configured.

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping


This section describes how to assign an OSP for the GMPS/GEPS to establish the mapping
between the subrack and the OSP.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
By default, the GMPS is displayed on the LMT. Configure only its OSP on the LMT. For
the GEPS, configure it and its OSP on the LMT.

Prerequisites
The SS7 OSP is already configured.

Preparation
Table 4-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
subrack-OSP mapping
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

OSP

B1

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-2
1

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

Procedure 4-2
2

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping (Continued)

Choose Configure Subrack-OSP Mapping from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8

Configure Subrack-OSP Mapping dialog box

Set the OSP of the GMPS by referring to Table 4-4.

Click Finish. The subrack-OSP mapping is configured.

4-12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Devices (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the BSC Devices (BM/TC Combined)

This section describes how to configure BSC devices on the LMT when the BM and TC are
configured in the same subrack.

Adding a GBSR Cabinet


This section describes how to add a GBSR cabinet and configure its attributes on the LMT. When
the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack, the GBSR cabinet must be configured
on the BSC side.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. When the BSC needs to support 2048 TRXs.

NOTE
The GBCR cabinet is displayed by default on the LMT. Configure the GBSR cabinet
on the LMT. Zero or one GBSR cabinet can be configured on the basis of the actual
traffic volume and transmission mode on the A Interface.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 4-5

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GBSR cabinet

Parameter

Example

Source

Cabinet No.

BSC internal planning

Cabinet Type

Local Cabinet

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-3
1

Adding a GBSR Cabinet

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-13

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a GEPS

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-3
2

Adding a GBSR Cabinet (Continued)

Choose Add BSC Cabinet from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9

Add Cabinet dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-5.

Click Finish. The GBSR cabinet is added.

Adding a GEPS
This section describes how to add a GEPS and configure its attributes on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. When the number of TRXs required by the


BSC exceeds the maximum number of TRXs supported
by a GMPS (512 TRXs), or the number of required
GEIUBs/GOIUBs exceeds the maximum number of boards
supported by a GMPS (two pairs), add a GEPS.

NOTE
The GEPS processes the basic services of the BSC. The settings of the GEPS depend
on the traffic volume of the BSC. When the BM and TC are configured in the same
subrack, the BSC can be configured with up to three GEPSs. A fan box is automatically
added when you add a subrack. Configure only the attributes of the fan box.

4-14

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a GEPS

Prerequisites

The cabinet has space for a new GEPS.

The OSP is already configured. For details, refer to Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points
on page 3-5.

Preparation
Table 4-6

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEPS

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack Type

GEPS

BSC internal planning

OPC

B1

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-4

Adding a GEPS

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the area where the subrack is to be added in the cabinet.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-15

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a GEPS

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-4
3

Adding a GEPS (Continued)

Choose Add Subrack. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10

Add Subrack dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-6.

Click Finish. The GEPS is added.

Right-click in the Fan Box area in the newly added GEPS.


Continued

4-16

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 4-4
7

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Adding a GEPS (Continued)

Choose Configure Fan Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11

Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 4-11, use the default settings or modify
them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The fan box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure more GEPSs.

Postrequisites
Before deleting the GEPSs that are initially configured, ensure that they are powered off.

Configuring the Power Distribution Box


This section describes how to add a power distribution box and configure its attributes on
the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

4-17

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

NOTE
Any subrack in the cabinet can be configured as the management subrack for the
power distribution box.

Prerequisites
The subrack that manages the power distribution box is configured.

Preparation
Table 4-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a power
distribution box
Parameter

Example

Source

Cabinet No.

BSC internal planning

Management Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Power Box Type

Normal Power
Distribution Box

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-5

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the power distribution box area.


Continued

4-18

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 4-5
3

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Configuring the Power Distribution Box (Continued)

Choose Add Power Distribution Box. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12

Add Power Distribution Box dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-7.

Click Finish. A power distribution box is added.

Right-click in the power distribution box area.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-19

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-5
7

Configuring the Power Distribution Box (Continued)

Choose Configure Power Distribution Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13

Configure Power Distribution Box dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 4-13, use the default settings or modify
them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The power distribution box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure power distribution boxes for more subracks.

Configuring the BSC Boards


This section describes how to add BSC boards or configure the attributes of the BSC boards.
When the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack, configure the GXPUM, GXPUT, GTNU,
GSCU, GGCU, GDPUX, GDPUP, GEIUA/GOIUA, GEIUB/GOIUB, and GEPUG/GEFUG.

4-20

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the GXPUM on page 3-24

Configuring the GXPUT on page 3-28

Configuring the GSCU on page 3-31

Configuring the GTNU on page 3-30

Configuring the GGCU on page 3-33

Configuring the GDPUX on page 4-32

Configuring the GDPUP on page 3-38

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA on page 4-38

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB on page 4-44

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) on page 4-48

Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on page 4-52

Configuring the GXPUM


This section describes how to add GXPUMs in slots 0 and 1 of the GMPS/GEPS and configure
their attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

NOTE
When the GXPUM is configured in the GMPS, parameters such as Load Key and Port
Attributes can be configured. When the GXPUM is configured in the GEPS, only
Load Key can be configured.

Preparation
Table 4-8

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUM

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Open All Port

Selected

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a GXPUM in the GMPS.

68P02909W07-A

4-21

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure
Procedure 4-6

Configuring the GXPUM

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet where the
GMPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click slot 0 or 1 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GXPUM.

Click Finish. The GXPUM is added.

Right-click GXPUM.
Continued

4-22

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 4-6
7

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-8.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-23

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-6
9

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16

10

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM (2)

Enable the alarm reporting function of ports according to actual requirements.


Continued

4-24

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 4-6
11

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(3)

12

Set the parameters according to actual requirements.

13

Click Finish. The GXPUM is configured.

Configuring the GXPUT


This section describes how to add GXPUTs in slots 2 and 3 of the GMPS/GEPS and configure
their attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. Configure the GXPUT when the GMPS/GEPS is


configured with more than 256 TRXs.

Prerequisites
None.

68P02909W07-A

4-25

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Preparation
Table 4-9

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUT

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GXPUT

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a GXPUT in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 4-7

Configuring the GXPUT

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet where the
GMPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click slot 2 or 3 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GXPUT.


Continued

4-26

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-7

Configuring the GXPUT (Continued)

Click Finish. The GXPUT is added.

Right-click a GXPUT.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-9.

Click Finish. The GXPUT is configured.

Configuring the GSCU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GSCUs on the LMT. The GSCUs are
displayed in slots 6 and 7 of each subrack by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

68P02909W07-A

4-27

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Preparation
Table 4-10

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSCU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-8

Configuring the GSCU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GSCU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-10.


Continued

4-28

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-8
4

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21

Configuring the GSCU (Continued)

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2)

Enable the alarm reporting function of ports according to actual requirements.

NOTE

Among the 12 ports on the GSCU, the alarm reporting function of all the
ports, except for ports 0, 1, 10, and 11, are disabled by default on the LMT.

Enable the alarm reporting function of the port connected to the Ethernet
cable to monitor whether the port is normal.

Click Finish. The GSCU is configured.

Configuring the GTNU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GTNUs on the LMT. The GTNUs are
displayed in slots 4 and 5 of each subrack by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

68P02909W07-A

4-29

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Preparation
Table 4-11

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GTNU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-9

Configuring the GTNU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GTNU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-11.

Click Finish. The GTNU is configured.

Configuring the GGCU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GGCUs on the LMT. The GGCUs are
displayed in slots 12 and 13 of the GMPS by default on the LMT.

4-30

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 4-12

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GGCU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-10

Configuring the GGCU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GGCU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key to Server.

Click Finish. The GGCU is configured.

68P02909W07-A

4-31

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the GDPUX


This section describes how to add a GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GDPUX.

Preparation
Table 4-13

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUX

Parameter

Example

Source

FuncType

Other board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GDPUX

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the GDPUX in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 4-11

Configuring the GDPUX

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 8-13 in the GMPS.


Continued

4-32

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-11
3

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24

Add Board dialog box-GDPUX

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GDPUX. Then click Finish. A
GDPUX is added.

Right-click GDPUX.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-33

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-11
6

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GDPUX

Continued

4-34

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-11

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-13.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-DSP TC

NOTE

When configuring the DSP TC attributes, select a DSP TC number first, and
then configure the attributes of this DSP TC.

If you select Configure All, all the DSP TCs will be configured based on the
settings of the current DSP TC displayed in the DSP TC No. drop-down
list box.

Modify the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 4-26 according to actual
requirements.

10

Click Finish. The GDPUX is configured.

68P02909W07-A

4-35

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the GDPUP


This section describes how to add a GDPUP in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GDPUP.

Preparation
Table 4-14

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GDPUP

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure a GDPUP in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 4-12

Configuring the GDPUP

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 8-13 in the GMPS.


Continued

4-36

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-12
3

Configuring the GDPUP (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GDPUP. Then click Finish. A
GDPUP is added.

Right-click GDPUP.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-37

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-12
6

Configuring the GDPUP (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-14.

Click Finish. The GDPUP is configured.

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA


This section describes how to configure the GEIUA/GOIUA. When the BM and TC are configured
in the same subrack, add a GEIUA/GOIUA to the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEIUA and GOIUA are responsible for the E1/T1 transmission and STM-1 transmission on
the A Interface respectively.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GEIUA/GOIUA.

4-38

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 4-15

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEIUA

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GEIUA

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

Table 4-16

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUA

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GOIUA

BSC internal planning

WorkMode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Tributary Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The procedures for configuring the GEIUA and GOIUA are the same. The following procedure
describes how to add a pair of GOIUAs (in active/standby mode) in the GMPS.

68P02909W07-A

4-39

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure
Procedure 4-13

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-25 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to A interface board, and set Board Type to GOIUA. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 4-15.

Click Finish. A pair of GOIUAs is added.

Right-click GOIUA.
Continued

4-40

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-13
7

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GOIUA

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-41

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-13
8

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Set Load Key, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-sub-board

Continued

4-42

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-13

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Set the attributes of the sub-board of the GOIUA by referring to Table 4-15.

10

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-32.

Figure 4-32

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port

NOTE
TX Frame Format and RX Frame Format should be negotiated with the peer.
For other parameters, use the default settings. By default, J2 Byte Alarm Report
Switch is set to Close. Modify it according to actual requirements. The BSC
recognizes only the J2 byte alarms of the SDH suggested format. If J2 Byte Alarm
Report Switch is set to Open, Motorola recommends that the peer expected RX
J2 byte be set to the SDH suggested format.
11

Set the attributes of the port on the GOIUA by referring to Table 4-15.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-43

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-13
12

Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-33.

Figure 4-33

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-APS

NOTE
Protect mode, Switch mode, and Recover mode should be negotiated with the
peer. For other parameters, use the default settings.
13

Click Finish. The GOIUA is configured.

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB


This section describes how to add a GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its
attributes. The GEIUB and GOIUB provide the E1/T1 transmission and STM-1 transmission
on the Abis interface respectively.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GEIUB/GOIUB.

4-44

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 4-17

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GEIUB

BSC internal planning

Work Mode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Table 4-18

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GOIUB

BSC internal planning

Work Mode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby
Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Tributary
Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The procedures for configuring the GEIUB and GOIUB are the same. The following procedure
describes how to add a pair of GEIUBs (in active/standby mode) in the GMPS.

68P02909W07-A

4-45

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure
Procedure 4-14

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-27 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34

Add Board dialog box

Set Board Type to GEIUB and set the parameters by referring to Table 4-17.

Click Finish. A GEIUB is added.

Right-click GEIUB.
Continued

4-46

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-14
7

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-47

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-14
8

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Set Load Key, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2)

NOTE

When configuring the port attributes of the GEIUB, select a port number
first, and then configure the attributes of this port.

If you select Configure All, all the ports will be configured based on the
settings of the current port displayed in the Port No. drop-down list box.

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 4-36, use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.

10

Click Finish. The GEIUB is configured.

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)


This section describes how to add a GEPUG in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEPUG is responsible for the FR transmission on the Gb interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The GEPUG is configured when the Gb interface


uses the FR transmission mode.

4-48

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GEPUG.

Preparation
Table 4-19

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

14

BSC internal planning

FuncType

Gb interface board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GEPUG

BSC internal planning

Work Mode

E1

Negotiation with the peer

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Frame Format

CRC4_MULTIFRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The following procedure describes how to configure a pair of GEPUGs (in active/standby
mode) in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 4-15

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select the cabinet where the
GMPS/GEPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 14-15 in the GMPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-49

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-15
3

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Gb interface board, and set Board Type to GEPUG. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 4-19. Then click Finish. A pair of GEPUGs is added.

Right-click GEPUG.
Continued

4-50

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 4-15
6

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEPUG

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-51

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-15
7

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-19, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-39.

Figure 4-39

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port

Set Frame Format by referring to Table 4-19. For other parameters in the dialog box shown
in Figure 4-39, use the default settings or modify them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The GEPUG is configured.

Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP)


This section describes how to add a GFGUG in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEPUG is responsible for the IP transmission on the Gb interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The GFGUG is configured when the Gb interface


uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GFGUG.

4-52

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 4-20

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

FuncType

Gb interface board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GFGUG

BSC internal planning

Net Mode

Independent Mode

BSC internal planning

Port Type

FE

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Port Active Status

ACTIVE

BSC internal planning

Device IP

Logical IP Address

192.168.70.2

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.70.132

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Destination IP Address

192.168.80.0

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Gateway

192.168.70.136

Negotiation with the peer

Port IP

BSC Router

The following procedure describes how to configure a GFGUG in the GMPS.

Procedure

Adding a board.
a.

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet
number from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

b.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-27 in the GMPS.

c.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-40.

68P02909W07-A

4-53

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Figure 4-40

Add Board dialog box

d.

Set FuncType to Gb interface board, and set Board Type to GFGUG. Set the
parameters by referring to Table 4-20.

e.

Click Finish. The GFGUG is added.

Configure the board attributes.


a.

Right-click GFGUG.

b.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-41.

4-54

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 4-41

c.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUG

Set Load Key by referring to Table 4-20, and then click Next. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-42.

Figure 4-42

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port

68P02909W07-A

4-55

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

d.

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Set the attributes of the Ethernet port by referring to Table 4-20.

NOTE
When you modify the attribute of a port on the GFGUG, the port becomes
faulty temporarily. If the board is in active/standby mode, an active/standby
switchover is performed automatically.

e.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-43.

Figure 4-43

f.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos

Set the QoS attributes according to actual requirements, and then click Next. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-44.

4-56

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 4-44

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection

g.

Set the physical link detection parameters according to actual requirements.

h.

Click Finish. The GFGUG attributes are configured.

Configure the device IP address.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure Device IP from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45.

68P02909W07-A

4-57

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Figure 4-45

b.

Configure Device IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46

Add Device IP dialog box

4-58

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-20. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 4-45.

NOTE
Device IP address is the logical IP address for communication. This IP
address is valid for the IP addresses of all the ports of the board. The device
IP addresses for the interface boards operating in active/standby mode
are the same. The IP addresses for the interface boards not operating in
active/standby mode should not be arranged in the same network segment.

d.

Click Finish. The device IP address is configured.

Configure the IP address of the Ethernet port.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure Ethernet Port IP from the shortcut menu.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47

b.

Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.

68P02909W07-A

4-59

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Figure 4-48

c.

Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-20. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 4-47.

NOTE
If Port Type is set to FE, one board can be configured with eight port
IP addresses on different network segments. If Port Type is set to GE,
one board can be configured with two port IP addresses on different
network segments. The port IP address and the device IP address must
be configured on different network segments. The port IP addresses for
the active and standby GFGUGs must be configured on the same network
segment.

d.

Click Finish. The port IP address is configured.

Configure the BSC router.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure BSC Router from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-49.

4-60

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 4-49

b.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure BSC Router dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50

Add BSC Router dialog box

68P02909W07-A

4-61

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC EAC

c.

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-20.

CAUTION
Destination IP Address must be set to the network address, and it cannot
be configured on the same network segment with the port IP address of
the GFGUG. Otherwise, Destination IP Address is invalid. Gateway IP
Address and the port IP address of the GFGUG must be configured on
the same network segment.
d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-49.

e.

Click Finish. The BSC router is configured.

Configuring the BSC EAC


This section describes how to configure the EAC for the BSC cabinet. The EAC gathers Boolean
values, analog values, and alarm threshold information and reports them to the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The EAC should be configured when the BSC has


to collect external alarm information.

NOTE
One BSC cabinet can be configured with only one EAC.

Prerequisites
The subrack that holds the EAC is configured.

Preparation
None.

Procedure
Procedure 4-16
1

Configuring the BSC EAC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of a subrack.


Continued

4-62

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC EAC

Procedure 4-16
2

Configuring the BSC EAC (Continued)

Choose Configure BSC EAC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-51.

Figure 4-51

Add BSC EAC dialog box-switch

NOTE
Use the default settings of the parameters or modify them according to actual
requirements.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-63

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Procedure 4-16
3

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the BSC EAC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52

Add BSC EAC dialog box-analog and alarm threshold

NOTE
Use the default settings of the parameters or modify them according to actual
requirements.
4

Click Finish. The BSC EAC is configured.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link


This section describes how to configure the communication links between the GMPS and the
GEPS or between GEPSs. The links are responsible for the TDM switching between subracks.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

4-64

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

NOTE

A maximum of three subrack communication links can be configured between


two subracks. In actual situations, an active and a standby communication
links are configured between subracks.

The communication between subracks is achieved through the GTNU in each


subrack. There are six external ports, numbered TDM0TDM5, on the panel of
the GTNU. Each port can be used by only one subrack communication link.

Prerequisites
The two subracks between which the communication link is to be established are configured.

Preparation

NOTE
Assume that the BSC is configured with one GMPS and two GEPSs. The GMPS is
subrack 0, and GEPSs are subracks 1 and 3.

Table 4-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Table 4-22 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A

4-65

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Table 4-23 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the mesh interconnection between subracks
through TDM ports.

Procedure

Configure the communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

4-66

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-54

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-21.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GMPS 0 and GEPS 1.

68P02909W07-A

4-67

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configure the communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

4-68

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-22.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GMPS 0 and GEPS 3.

68P02909W07-A

4-69

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configure the communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

4-70

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-23.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GEPS 1 and GEPS 3.

68P02909W07-A

4-71

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Links (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the BSC Links (BM/TC Combined)

This section describes how to configure BSC links on the A Interface and the Gb interface
when the BM and TC are configured in the same subracks. These links are responsible for the
signaling transmission between the BSC and other NEs.

Configuring Links on the A Interface


This section describes how to configure E1 connections and SS7 signaling links on the A
Interface when the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack. These E1 connections and
SS7 signaling links are responsible for the communication between the BSC and the MSC.

Adding an A Interface E1/T1


This section describes how to configure the connection on the A Interface to establish a path
between the BSC and the MSC when the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GEIUA/GOIUA in the GMPS/GEPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the
GEIUA/GOIUA on page 4-38.

Preparation
Table 4-24 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an A
Interface E1/T1
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Start CIC

Negotiation with the peer

DSP Group No.

Negotiation with the peer

4-72

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure
Procedure 4-17

Adding an A Interface E1/T1

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUA in the GMPS.

Choose Configure A Interface E1/T1 from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59

Configure A Interface E1/T1 dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-73

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 4-17
3

Adding an A Interface E1/T1 (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-60.

Figure 4-60

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Adding an A interface E1/T1

On the A Interface E1/T1 Attributes tab page, set the parameters by referring to
Table 4-24.

NOTE
One CIC group contains 32 CICs. If multiple E1s/T1s have the same OSP and the
same DSP group, the start CIC for each E1/T1 must be unique. If the start CIC of
the first E1/T1 is 0, then the start CIC of the second E1/T1 and that of the first
E1/T1 must be in different groups, and the start CIC of the second E1/T1 must
be greater than 31. On the CIC Attributes tab page, use the default settings or
modify them according to actual requirements.
5

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-59.

Click Finish. The A interface E1/T1 is added.

Repeat step 1 through step 6 to add more E1/T1 connections on the A interface.

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link


This section describes how to add an SS7 signaling link on the A Interface when the BM and
TC are configured in the same subrack. The SS7 signaling link is responsible for the signaling
transmission between the BSC and the MSC.

4-74

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
For details about the configuration of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link, refer to Configuring

High-speed Signaling Links

Prerequisites

The SS7 DSP is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the SS7 Signaling Points on
page 3-5.

The GMPS or the GEPS is configured with the GXPUM. For details, refer to Configuring
the GXPUM on page 3-24.

The A Interface E1/T1 is configured.

The following procedure describes how to configure a 64 kbit/s SS7 signaling link on the
GOIUA in the GMPS.

Preparation
Table 4-25
link

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding an SS7 signaling

Parameter

Example

Source

Rate Type

64 kbit/s

Negotiation with the peer

A Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

A Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

A Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

A Interface Timeslot Mask

TS16

Negotiation with the peer

SLC

Negotiation with the peer

SLC Send

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 4-18

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUA in the GMPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-75

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 4-18
2

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link (Continued)

Choose Configure SS7 Signaling Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61

Configure SS7 Signaling Link dialog box

Continued

4-76

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 4-18
3

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-62.

Figure 4-62

Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP2)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-77

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-18

Adding an SS7 Signaling Link (Continued)

On the MPT2 tab page, set the parameters by referring to Table 4-25.

Click the MTP3 tab, the tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-63.

Figure 4-63

Chapter

Adding an SS7 signaling link (MTP3)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-25.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-61.

Click Finish. The SS7 Signaling links are added.

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission


Mode on the Gb Interface)
This section describes how to configure the NSE, BC, SGSN Clock, NSVC, and PTPBVC on the
Gb interface for the FR transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.

4-78

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Configuring the NSE on page 3-101

Configuring the BC on page 3-103

Configuring the SGSN Clock on page 3-106

Configuring the NSVC on page 3-108

Configuring the PTPBVC on page 3-111

Configuring the NSE


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Entity (NSE) on the Gb interface
and determine the subnetwork protocol type.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

When adding an NSE, set the NSE identifier, subnetwork protocol type, and
agent subrack number.

One BSC can be configured with a maximum of 128 NSEs. Multiple NSEs can be
assigned on the same agent subrack.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 4-26 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over FR

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

68P02909W07-A

4-79

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter

Procedure
Procedure 4-19

Configuring the NSE

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure NSE from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-64.

Figure 4-64

Configure NSE dialog box

Continued

4-80

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-19
3

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-65.

Figure 4-65

Add NSE dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-26. Click OK to return to the dialog box shown
in Figure 4-64.

Click Finish. The NSE is configured.

Configuring the BC
This section describes how to configure the bearer channel (BC) on the Gb interface when the
Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode. The BC is responsible for the data transmission
between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The BC is configured only when the Gb interface


uses the FR transmission mode.

NOTE
BC refers to a fixed number of timeslots on the E1/T1 when the Gb interface uses the
FR transmission mode.

68P02909W07-A

4-81

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

Preparation
Table 4-27 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on
the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Frame Relay Protocol Type

Q933

Negotiation with the peer

Occupied Timeslot

T1-T16

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N391)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N392)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N393)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (T391)

10

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 4-20

Configuring the BC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

4-82

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-20
2

Configuring the BC (Continued)

Choose Configure BC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-66.

Figure 4-66

Configure BC dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-83

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-20
3

Chapter

Configuring the BC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-67.

Figure 4-67

Add BC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-27.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-66.

Click Finish. The BC is configured.

Configuring the SGSN Clock


This section describes how to configure the SGSN clock when the Gb interface uses the FR
transmission mode. The SGSN clock is responsible for the synchronization between the GEPUG
and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The SGSN clock is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the FR transmission mode.

4-84

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

NOTE
The clock signal on the SGSN side is carried by the BC. Configure the SGSN clock by
specifying the port of the BC.

Prerequisites

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

The BC is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the BC on page 3-103.

Preparation
Table 4-28
clock

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-21

Configuring the SGSN Clock

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-85

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-21
2

Chapter

Configuring the SGSN Clock (Continued)

Choose Config SGSN Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-68.

Figure 4-68

Configure SGSN Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-28.

Click Add. The SGSN clock is configured.

Configuring the NSVC


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Virtual Connection (NSVC) for
service transmission on the Gb interface when the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode.
The NSVC and the BC are bound together to provide the data transmission between the BSC
and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The NSVC is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the FR transmission mode.

4-86

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

NOTE

NSVC refers to the virtual connection on the NS layer. One NSVC is located on
the BC of one E1/T1 and belongs to one BC/NSE. One BC/NSE can be configured
with multiple NSVCs.

One NSVC corresponds to one PVC. When configuring an NSVC, specify the
corresponding PVC.

Prerequisites

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-101.

The BC is configured.

Preparation
Table 4-29 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSVC Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port Number

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Data Link Connection Identifier

16

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 4-22

Configuring the NSVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-87

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-22
2

Chapter

Configuring the NSVC (Continued)

Choose Configure NSVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-69.

Figure 4-69

Configure NSVC dialog box

Continued

4-88

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-22
3

Configuring the NSVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-70.

Figure 4-70

Add NSVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-29.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-69.

Click Finish. The NSVC on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the PTPBVC


This section describes how to configure the PTPBVC on the Gb interface to bind the GPRS cell
with the NSE.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
One GPRS cell can be configured with only one PTPBVC. One NSE can be configured
with multiple PTPBVCs.

68P02909W07-A

4-89

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-101.

A GPRS cell is configured and the activity state of the cell is Activated.

Preparation
Table 4-30 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-23

Configuring the PTPBVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

4-90

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-23
2

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure PTPBVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-71.

Figure 4-71

Configure PTBBVC dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-91

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-23
3

Chapter

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-72.

Figure 4-72

Add PTPBVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-30.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-71.

Click Finish. The PTPBVC is configured.

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission


Mode on the Gb Interface)
This section describes how to configure the NSE, local NSVL, remote NSVL, and PTPBVC on the
Gb interface for the IP transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.

Configuring the NSE on page 4-93

Configuring the Local NSVL on page 4-95

Configuring the Remote NSVL on page 4-98

Configuring the PTPBVC on page 4-100

4-92

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Configuring the NSE


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Entity (NSE) on the Gb interface
and determine the subnetwork protocol type.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

When adding an NSE, set the NSE identifier, subnetwork protocol type, and
agent subrack number.

One BSC can be configured with a maximum of 128 NSEs. Multiple NSEs can
be assigned on the same agent subrack.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 4-31 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over IP

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-24

Configuring the NSE

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-93

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-24
2

Chapter

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure NSE from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 4-73.

Figure 4-73

Configure NSE dialog box

Continued

4-94

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-24
3

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-74.

Figure 4-74

Add NSE dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-31.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-73.

Click Finish. The NSE is configured.

Configuring the Local NSVL


This section describes how to configure the local NSVL (NSVL on the BSC side) on the Gb
interface when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode. The local NSVL is responsible
for the data transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Local NSVL is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GFGUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on
page 3-59.

68P02909W07-A

4-95

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter

Preparation
Table 4-32 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Local NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the peer

UDP Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

PIU Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

PIU Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 4-25

Configuring the Local NSVL

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GFGUG.


Continued

4-96

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-25
2

Configuring the Local NSVL (Continued)

Choose Configure Local NSVL from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 4-75.

Figure 4-75

Configure Local NSVL dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-97

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-25
3

Chapter

Configuring the Local NSVL (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-76.

Figure 4-76

Add Local NSVL dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-32.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-75.

Click Finish. The local NSVL on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the Remote NSVL


This section describes how to configure the remote NSVL (NSVL on the SGSN side) on the Gb
interface when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode. The remote NSVL is responsible
for the data transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Remote NSVL is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GFGUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on
page 3-59.

4-98

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Preparation
Table 4-33 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Remote NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.80.1

Negotiation with the peer

IP Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 4-26

Configuring the Remote NSVL

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure Remote NSVL from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-77.

Figure 4-77

Configure Remote NSVL dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-99

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-26
3

Chapter

Configuring the Remote NSVL (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-78.

Figure 4-78

Add Remote NSVL dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-33.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-77.

Click Finish. The remote NSVL on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the PTPBVC


This section describes how to configure the PTPBVC on the Gb interface to bind the GPRS cell
with the NSE.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
One GPRS cell can be configured with only one PTPBVC. One NSE can be configured
with multiple PTPBVCs.

4-100

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-115.

A GPRS cell is configured and the activity state of the cell is Activated.

Preparation
Table 4-34 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BSSGP Virtual Connection


Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-27

Configuring the PTPBVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-101

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Procedure 4-27
2

Chapter

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure PTPBVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-79.

Figure 4-79

Configure PTPBVC dialog box

Continued

4-102

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 4-27
3

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-80.

Figure 4-80

Add PTPBVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-34.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 4-79.

Click Finish. The PTPBVC is configured.

68P02909W07-A

4-103

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Clock (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the BSC Clock (BM/TC Combined)

This section describes how to configure BSC clock signals when the BM and TC are configured
in the same subracks. The BSC clock signals are responsible for the synchronization of boards
in each subrack.

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS


The MSC provides the line clock of the BSC. When the BM and TC are configured in the same
subrack, the GMPS extracts the line clock from the MSC through the A Interface board. This
line clock is used as the reference clock for the GMPS and the GEPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
If the GEIUA is configured in the GMPS, two line clock signals, line 0 and line 1, can
be configured. If the GOIUA is configured in the GMPS, only one line clock signal can
be configured and the line clock signal must be configured on port 0 on the GOIUA.

Prerequisites

The GEIUA/GOIUA is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEIUA/GOIUA


on page 3-41.

If the line clock is to be configured on the GEIUA, an A Interface E1/T1 must be configured.
For changes in the document, refer to Adding an A Interface E1/T1 on page 3-94.

4-104

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

Preparation
Table 4-35 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock
on line 0 for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

Line No.

LINE0

BSC internal planning

Line Clock Type

8K

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Backup Port No.

BSC internal planning

Table 4-36 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the clock
on line 1 for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

Line No.

LINE1

BSC internal planning

Line Clock Type

8K

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Backup Port No.

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure two line clock signals on the GEIUA in
the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 4-28
1

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GMPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

4-105

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS

Procedure 4-28
2

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS (Continued)

Choose Configure Line Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-81.

Figure 4-81

Configuring the clock on line 0

NOTE
When the A Interface E1 where the port of the selected Board Port No. is located
incurs a fault, the GMPS cannot extract the line clock from the A Interface. In
this case, the GMPS can extract the line clock from the A Interface through the A
Interface E1 where the port of the selected Backup Port No. is located.

Board Slot No.: Number of the slot where the GEIUA/GOIUA configured
with the A Interface E1 is located.

Board Port No.: Number of the port connected to one A Interface E1 on


the GEIUA/GOIUA.

Backup Port No.: Number of the port connected to another A Interface


E1 on the GEIUA.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-35.

Click Add. The clock on LINE0 for the GMPS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 2 to open the configuration dialog box.


Continued

4-106

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the System Clock

Procedure 4-28
6

Select LINE1 and set the parameters by referring to Table 4-36, as shown in Figure 4-82.

Figure 4-82

Configuring the Line Clock for the GMPS (Continued)

Configuring the clock on line 1

Click Add. The clock on LINE1 for the GMPS is configured.

Configuring the System Clock


This section describes how to configure the system clock, that is, the input clock for the GGCU.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
The clock for the GGCU can be the 2M external clock or the line clock extracted from
the MSC through the A Interface board. The GGCU processes the input clock and
generates the 8 kHz clock, which is used as the transmission synchronization clock
and the time synchronization clock for the boards in the GMPS or GEPS.

The BITS clock is of two types: 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s.

The system clock has four priorities: priority 1 to priority 4, from the highest
to the lowest.

When the BITS clock is provided, it should be configured as the system clock
and enjoys the highest priority.

68P02909W07-A

4-107

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the System Clock

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Prerequisites

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The BITS clock is ready, or the line clock for the GMPS is configured.

Preparation
Table 4-37
clock

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system

Parameter

Example

Source

Priority

BSC internal planning

BSC internal planning

BSC internal planning

2M external clock 0

BSC internal planning

LINE0

BSC internal planning

LINE1

BSC internal planning

2 MHz

BSC internal planning

8 kHz

BSC internal planning

8 kHz

BSC internal planning

Source Type

Source Sub-type

Procedure
Procedure 4-29
1

Configuring the System Clock

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

4-108

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS

Procedure 4-29
2

Configuring the System Clock (Continued)

Choose Configure System Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 4-83.

Figure 4-83

Configure System Clock dialog box

CAUTION
Source Type and Work Mode cannot be configured in one operation. Configure
them separately. After configuring Source Type, exit the configuration wizard,
and then start the configuration wizard again to configure Work Mode.
3

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-37.

Click Finish. The system clock is configured.

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS


This section describes how to configure the 8 kHz clock provided by the backplane of the GGCU
as the 8K reference clock for the GMPS. The 8K reference clock serves as the synchronization
clock for the boards in the GMPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

4-109

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on
page 3-31.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The system clock is configured.

Preparation
Table 4-38 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference
clock for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

GGCU Backplane

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-30
1

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GMPS.


Continued

4-110

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Procedure 4-30
2

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS (Continued)

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-38.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GMPS is configured.

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS


This section describes how to configure the 8 kHz clock provided by the GGCU as the 8K
reference clock for the GEPS. The 8K reference clock serves as the synchronization clock
for the boards in the GEPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

4-111

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GEPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on page
3-31.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The system clock is configured.

Preparation
Table 4-39 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K
reference clock for the GEPS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

GGCU Panel

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 4-31
1

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GEPS.


Continued

4-112

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Procedure 4-31
2

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS (Continued)

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-85.

Figure 4-85

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 4-39.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GEPS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 4 to configure the 8K reference clock for more GEPSs.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

4-113

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Chapter 4: Configuring the BSC (BM/TC Combined)

4-114

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

5
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode
on the A Interface)

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

5-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)


Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Chapter 5:

Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A


Interface)

This section describes how to configure the BSC global data, devices, links, and clock on the
BSC Local Manager when the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode.

5-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Global Data (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Configuring the BSC Global Data (IP Transmission Mode


on the A Interface)

When the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode, the BSC global data includes BSC
attributes, M3UA data, and subrack-OSP mapping.

Configuring the BSC Attributes


This section describes how to configure BSC attributes. In the initial configuration of BSC
attributes, configure only the basic attributes. For other attributes, use the default settings.
The BSC attributes include:

Basic Data

Flow Control Data

BSC Timer

Software Parameters

User Resource Binding

SCCP

NSS and BSSGP

MSC Pool Parameters

Null-NRI and DPC Route

Trigger Saving Power Function

IP Transfers

Abis Congestion Control

Single Pass Exclude MSISDN Number

Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The BSC attributes have been determined in network planning.

68P02909W07-A

5-3

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Attributes

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Preparation
Table 5-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC attributes
(BM/TC combined)
Parameter

Example

Source

BSC Name

BSC001

Network planning

Country Code

86

Network planning

City Code

021

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

A Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Um Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

Abis Interface Tag

GSM_PHASE_2+

Network planning

NTP Server

10.161.72.251

Negotiation with the OMC-S/T

BSC Subrack Combination


Type

IP on A Interface

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-1
1

Configuring the BSC Attributes

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

5-4

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Procedure 5-1
2

Choose Configure BSC Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1

Configuring the BSC Attributes (Continued)

Configure BSC Attributes dialog box

On the Basic Data tab page, set the parameters by referring to Table 5-1.

NOTE
The parameters not listed in Table 5-1 are optional. Use the default settings or
modify them according to actual requirements.
4

Click Finish. The BSC attributes are configured.

Configuring the M3UA Entities


When the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode, configure the M3UA entities. The local
entity and destination entity must be configured. If there is no direct physical link between the
local entity and the destination entity, configure a signaling transfer entity.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

5-5

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

CAUTION

The local entity must be configured before the destination entity is configured.

The local entity and destination entity must be configured before the signaling
transfer entity is configured.

The name and code of each entity must be unique.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 5-2
entities

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU

Parameter

Example

Source

Local Entity Name

BSC001

BSC internal planning

OPC (Hex)

B1

Network planning

Route Context

4294967295

Negotiation with the peer

Encoding Scheme

14

Network planning

Network Indicator

NATB

Network planning

Entity Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

DSP (Hex)

D1

Network planning

Using STP

Yes

Network planning

Protocol

RFC3332

Negotiation with the peer

5-6

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Table 5-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the signaling
transfer entity
Parameter

Example

Source

STE Name

MGW001

BSC internal planning

STP (Hex)

C1

Network planning

Protocol

RFC3332

Network planning

This procedure describes how to configure the M3UA Entities.

Procedure

Configure the M3UA local entity.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure M3UA Data>Configure M3UA Entity from the shortcut menu.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2

c.

Configure M3UA Entity dialog box-local entity

On the M3UA LE tab page, click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-3.

68P02909W07-A

5-7

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-3

Add M3UA Local Entity dialog box

NOTE
If a local entity exists, Local Entity Name, Encoding Scheme, and
Network Indicator of the local entity are displayed by default in the
dialog box shown in Figure 5-3.

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-2.

e.

Click OK. The M3UA local entity is configured.

Configure the M3UA destination entity.


a.

In the dialog box shown in Figure 5-2, click the M3UA DE tab to display the tab
page, as shown in Figure 5-4.

5-8

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 5-4

b.

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Configure M3UA Entity dialog box-destination entity

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5

Add M3UA Destination Entity dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-9

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

NOTE
If there is no direct physical link between the local entity and the
destination entity, configure a signaling transfer entity. In the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-5, set Using STP to Yes. Route Context is mapped
to a destination entity/signaling transfer entity. Except the invalid value
4294967295, the Route Context of a destination entity/signaling transfer
entity must be unique. Otherwise, the configuration is invalid.

c.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-2.

d.

Click OK. The M3UA destination entity is configured.

Check whether there is a direct physical link between the local entity and the destination
entity.
Then...

If...
There is a direct physical link between the local
entity and the destination entity

The task is complete.

There is no direct physical link between the local


entity and the destination entity

Go to Step Configure the M3UA


signaling transfer entity.

Configure the M3UA signaling transfer entity.


a.

In the dialog box shown in Figure 5-2, click the M3UA STE tab to display the tab
page, as shown in Figure 5-6.

5-10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 5-6

b.

Configuring the M3UA Entities

Configure M3UA Entity dialog box-signaling transfer entity

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7

Add M3UA Transfer Entity dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

c.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-3.

d.

Click OK. The M3UA signaling transfer entity is configured.

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping


This section describes how to assign an OSP for the GMPS/GEPS to establish the mapping
between the subrack and the OSP.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
The GMPS is displayed by default on the LMT. Configure only its OSP on the LMT. For
the GEPS, configure it and its OSP on the LMT.

Prerequisites
The M3UA local entity is configured.

Preparation
Table 5-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
subrack-OSP mapping
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

OSP

B1

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-2
1

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

5-12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping

Procedure 5-2
2

Configuring the Subrack-OSP Mapping (Continued)

Choose Configure Subrack-OPC Mapping from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8

Configure Subrack-OPC Mapping dialog box

Set the OSP of the GMPS by referring to Table 5-4.

Click Finish. The subrack-OSP mapping is configured.

68P02909W07-A

5-13

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Devices (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)


Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Chapter 5:

Configuring the BSC Devices (IP Transmission Mode


on the A Interface)

This section describes how to configure the BSC devices on the LMT when the A Interface uses
the IP transmission mode.

Adding a GBSR Cabinet


This section describes how to add a GBSR cabinet and configure its attributes on the LMT. When
the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode, the GBSR cabinet must be configured on the
BSC side.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. When the BSC is configured with 2048 TRXs, add


a GBSR cabinet.

NOTE
The GBCR cabinet is displayed by default on the LMT. Configure the GBSR cabinet
on the LMT. Zero or one GBSR cabinet can be configured on the basis of the actual
traffic volume.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 5-5

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GBSR cabinet

Parameter

Example

Source

Cabinet No.

BSC internal planning

Cabinet Type

Local Cabinet

BSC internal planning

5-14

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a GEPS

Procedure
Procedure 5-3

Adding a GBSR Cabinet

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Add BSC Cabinet from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9

Add Cabinet dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-5.

Click Finish. The GBSR cabinet is added.

Adding a GEPS
This section describes how to add a GEPS and configure its attributes on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. When the number of TRXs required by the BSC


exceeds the maximum number of TRXs supported by a
subrack (usually 512 TRXs), or the number of required
GEIUBs/GOIUBs exceeds the maximum number of boards
supported by a subrack (two pairs), add a GEPS.

68P02909W07-A

5-15

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a GEPS

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

NOTE
The GEPS processes the basic services of the BSC. The settings of the GEPS depend
on the traffic volume of the BSC. When the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode,
the BSC can be configured with up to two GEPSs to form the 1 GMPS + 2 GEPSs
combination. This combination can hold up to 2048 TRXs. A fan box is automatically
added when you add a subrack. Configure only the attributes of the fan box.

Prerequisites

The cabinet has the space for a new GEPS.

The BSC is configured with the M3UA entities. For details, refer to Configuring the M3UA
Entities on page 5-5.

Preparation
Table 5-6

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEPS

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack Type

GEPS

BSC internal planning

OPC

B1

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-4

Adding a GEPS

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the area where the subrack is to be added in the cabinet.


Continued

5-16

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 5-4
3

Adding a GEPS

Adding a GEPS (Continued)

Choose Add Subrack. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10

Add Subrack dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-6.

Click Finish. The GEPS is added.

Right-click in the Fan Box area in the newly added GEPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-17

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Procedure 5-4
7

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Adding a GEPS (Continued)

Choose Configure Fan Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11

Configure Fan Box Attributes dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 5-11, use the default settings or modify
them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The fan box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure more GEPSs.

Postrequisites
Before deleting the GEPSs that are initially configured, ensure that they are powered off.

Configuring the Power Distribution Box


This section describes how to add a power distribution box and configure its attributes on
the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

5-18

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

NOTE
Any subrack in the cabinet can be configured as the management subrack for the
power distribution box.

Prerequisites
The subrack that manages the power distribution box is configured.

Preparation
Table 5-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a power
distribution box
Parameter

Example

Source

Cabinet No.

BSC internal planning

Management Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Power Box Type

Normal Power Distribution Box

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-5

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click in the power distribution box area.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-19

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Power Distribution Box

Procedure 5-5
3

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Configuring the Power Distribution Box (Continued)

Choose Add Power Distribution Box. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12

Add Power Distribution Box dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-7.

Click Finish. A power distribution box is added.

Right-click in the power distribution box area.


Continued

5-20

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 5-5
7

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the Power Distribution Box (Continued)

Choose Configure Power Distribution Box Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13

Configure Power Distribution Box dialog box

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 5-13, use the default settings or modify
them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The power distribution box is configured.

10

Repeat step 1 through step 9 to configure power distribution boxes for more subracks.

Configuring the BSC Boards


This section describes how to add BSC boards or configure the attributes of the BSC boards.
When the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode, the GXPUM, GXPUT, GTNU, GSCU, GGCU,
GDPUX, GDPUP, GFGUA/GOGUA, GEIUB/GOIUB, and GEPUG/GEFUG must be configured.

68P02909W07-A

5-21

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Configuring the GXPUM on page 3-24

Configuring the GXPUT on page 3-28

Configuring the GSCU on page 3-31

Configuring the GTNU on page 3-30

Configuring the GGCU on page 3-33

Configuring the GDPUX on page 4-32

Configuring the GDPUP on page 3-38

Configuring the GFGUA/GOGUA on page 5-41

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB on page 4-44

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) on page 4-48

Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on page 4-52

Configuring the GXPUM


This section describes how to add GXPUMs in slots 0 and 1 of the GMPS/GEPS and configure
their attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

NOTE
When the GXPUM is configured in the GMPS, parameters such as Load Key and Port
Attributes can be configured. When the GXPUM is configured in the GEPS, only
Load Key can be configured.

Preparation
Table 5-8

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUM

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Open All Port

Selected

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a GXPUM in the GMPS.

5-22

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure
Procedure 5-6

Configuring the GXPUM

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet where the
GMPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click slot 0 or 1 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-14.

Figure 5-14

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GXPUM.

Click Finish. The GXPUM is added.

Right-click GXPUM.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-23

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-6
7

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(1)

Continued

5-24

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 5-6

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-8.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(2)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-25

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-6

Configuring the GXPUM (Continued)

10

Enable the alarm reporting function of ports according to actual requirements.

11

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GXPUM(3)

12

Set the parameters according to actual requirements.

13

Click Finish. The GXPUM is configured.

Configuring the GXPUT


This section describes how to add GXPUTs in slots 2 and 3 of the GMPS/GEPS and configure
their attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. Configure the GXPUT when the GMPS/GEPS is


configured with more than 256 TRXs.

5-26

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 5-9

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUT

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GXPUT

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a GXPUT in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 5-7

Configuring the GXPUT

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet where the
GMPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-27

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-7

Configuring the GXPUT (Continued)

Right-click slot 2 or 3 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GXPUT.

Click Finish. The GXPUT is added.

Right-click a GXPUT.
Continued

5-28

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-7
7

Configuring the GXPUT (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-9.

Click Finish. The GXPUT is configured.

Configuring the GSCU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GSCUs on the LMT. The GSCUs are
displayed in slots 6 and 7 of each subrack by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

68P02909W07-A

5-29

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Preparation
Table 5-10

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSCU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-8

Configuring the GSCU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GSCU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-20.

Figure 5-20

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-10.


Continued

5-30

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-8
4

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21

Configuring the GSCU (Continued)

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2)

Enable the alarm reporting function of ports according to actual requirements.

NOTE

Among the 12 ports on the GSCU, the alarm reporting function of all the
ports, except for ports 0, 1, 10, and 11, are disabled by default on the LMT.

Enable the alarm reporting function of the port connected to the Ethernet
cable to monitor whether the port is normal.

Click Finish. The GSCU is configured.

Configuring the GTNU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GTNUs on the LMT. The GTNUs are
displayed in slots 4 and 5 of each subrack by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

68P02909W07-A

5-31

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Preparation
Table 5-11

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GTNU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-9

Configuring the GTNU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GTNU.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-11.

Click Finish. The GTNU is configured.

5-32

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the GGCU


This section describes how to configure the attributes of the GGCUs on the LMT. The GGCUs are
displayed in slots 12 and 13 of the GMPS by default on the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 5-12

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GGCU

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-10

Configuring the GGCU

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click GGCU.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-33

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-10
2

Configuring the GGCU (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-23

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key to Server.

Click Finish. The GGCU is configured.

Configuring the GDPUX


This section describes how to add a GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GDPUX.

5-34

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Preparation
Table 5-13

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUX

Parameter

Example

Source

FuncType

Other board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GDPUX

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the GDPUX in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 5-11

Configuring the GDPUX

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 8-13 in the GMPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-35

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-11
3

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-24.

Figure 5-24

Add Board dialog box-GDPUX

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GDPUX. Then click Finish. A
GDPUX is added.

Right-click GDPUX.
Continued

5-36

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-11
6

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GDPUX

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-37

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-11

Configuring the GDPUX (Continued)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-13.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-DSP TC

NOTE

When configuring the DSP TC attributes, select a DSP TC number first, and
then configure the attributes of this DSP TC.

If you select Configure All, all the DSP TCs will be configured based on the
settings of the current DSP TC displayed in the DSP TC No. drop-down
list box.

Modify the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 5-26 according to actual
requirements.

10

Click Finish. The GDPUX is configured.

5-38

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configuring the GDPUP


This section describes how to add a GDPUP in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GDPUP.

Preparation
Table 5-14

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GDPUP

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure a GDPUP in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 5-12

Configuring the GDPUP

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 8-13 in the GMPS.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-39

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-12
3

Configuring the GDPUP (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-27.

Figure 5-27

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Other board, and set Board Type to GDPUP. Then click Finish. A
GDPUP is added.

Right-click GDPUP.
Continued

5-40

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-12
6

Configuring the GDPUP (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28

Configure Board Attributes dialog box

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-14.

Click Finish. The GDPUP is configured.

Configuring the GFGUA/GOGUA


This section describes how to add a GFGUA/GOGUA in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its
attributes when the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode. The GFGUA/GOGUA provides
IP transmission on the A Interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The GMPS/GEPS has empty slots to hold the GFGUA/GOGUA.

68P02909W07-A

5-41

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Preparation
Table 5-15

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUA

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

19

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GFGUA

BSC internal planning

Net Mode

Independent Mode

BSC internal planning

Port Type

FE

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Port Active Status

ACTIVE

BSC internal planning

Logical IP Address

192.168.10.2

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.10.131

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Destination IP Address

192.168.30.0

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Gateway

192.168.10.136

Negotiation with the peer

Device IP

Port IP

BSC Router

The procedures for configuring the GFGUA and GOGUA are the same. The following procedure
describes how to configure a GFGUA in the GMPS.

Procedure

Adding a board.
a.

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet
number from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

b.

Right-click any empty slot among slots 1427.

c.

Choose Add Board from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-29.

5-42

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 5-29

Configuring the BSC Boards

Add Board dialog box

d.

Set FuncType to A interface board, and set Board Type to GFGUA. Set the
parameters by referring to Table 5-15.

e.

Click Finish. The GFGUA is added.

Configure the board attributes.


a.

Right-click GFGUA.

b.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-30.

68P02909W07-A

5-43

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-30

c.

Set Load Key, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-31.

Figure 5-31

d.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUA

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port

Set the attributes of the Ethernet port by referring to Table 5-15.

5-44

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

NOTE
When you modify the attribute of a port on the GFGUA, the port becomes
faulty temporarily. If the board is in active/standby mode, an active/standby
switchover is performed automatically.

e.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-32.

Figure 5-32

f.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos

Set the QoS attributes according to actual requirements, and then click Next. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-33.

68P02909W07-A

5-45

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-33

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection

g.

Set the physical link detection parameters according to actual requirements.

h.

Click Finish. The GFGUA attributes are configured.

Configure the device IP address.


a.

Right-click GFGUA and choose Configure Device IP from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-34.

5-46

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 5-34

b.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure Device IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35.

Figure 5-35

Add Device IP dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-47

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

c.

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-15. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-34.

NOTE
Device IP address is the logical IP address for communication. This IP
address is valid for the IP addresses of all the ports of the board. The device
IP addresses for the interface boards operating in active/standby mode
are the same. The IP addresses for the interface boards not operating in
active/standby mode should not be arranged in the same network segment.

d.

Click Finish. The device IP address is configured.

Configure the IP address of the Ethernet port.


a.

Right-click GFGUA and choose Configure Ethernet Port IP from the shortcut menu.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36

b.

Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-37.

5-48

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Figure 5-37

c.

Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-15. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-36.

NOTE
If Port Type is set to FE, one board can be configured with eight port
IP addresses on different network segments. If Port Type is set to GE,
one board can be configured with two port IP addresses on different
network segments. The port IP address and the device IP address must
be configured on different network segments. The port IP addresses for
the active and standby GFGUAs must be configured on the same network
segment.

d.

Click Finish. The port IP address is configured.

Configure the BSC router.


a.

Right-click GFGUA and choose Configure BSC Router from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-38.

68P02909W07-A

5-49

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-38

b.

Configure BSC Router dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39

Add Board Router dialog box

5-50

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-15.

CAUTION
Destination IP Address must be set to the network address, and it cannot
be configured on the same network segment with the port IP address of
the GFGUA. Otherwise, Destination IP Address is invalid. Gateway IP
Address and the port IP address of the GFGUA must be configured on
the same network segment.
d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-38.

e.

Click Finish. The BSC router is configured.

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB


This section describes how to add a GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its
attributes. The GEIUB and GOIUB provide the E1/T1 transmission and STM-1 transmission
on the Abis interface respectively.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GEIUB/GOIUB.

Preparation
Table 5-16

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a GEIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GEIUB

BSC internal planning

Work Mode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Table 5-17

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Type

GOIUB

BSC internal planning

Work Mode

E1

BSC internal planning

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-51

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Table 5-17
(Continued)

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GOIUB

Parameter

Example

Source

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Tributary Numbering

HuaWei mode

Negotiation with the peer

TX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J0 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J1 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

Expect RX J2 Byte

MGW SDH DEFAULT (character


string)

Negotiation with the peer

TX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

RX Frame Format

DOUBLE_FRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The procedures for configuring the GEIUB and GOIUB are the same. The following procedure
describes how to add a pair of GEIUBs (in active/standby mode) in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 5-13

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet number
from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Continued

5-52

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-13

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-27 in the GMPS.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-40.

Figure 5-40

Add Board dialog box

Set Board Type to GEIUB and set the parameters by referring to Table 5-16.

Click Finish. A GEIUB is added.

Right-click GEIUB.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-53

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-13
7

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-41.

Figure 5-41

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (1)

Continued

5-54

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-13
8

Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB (Continued)

Set Load Key, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-42.

Figure 5-42

Configure Board Attributes dialog box (2)

NOTE

When configuring the port attributes of the GEIUB, select a port number
first, and then configure the attributes of this port.

If you select Configure All, all the ports will be configured based on the
settings of the current port displayed in the Port No. drop-down list box.

For the parameters in the dialog box shown in Figure 5-42, use the default settings of the
parameters or modify them according to actual requirements.

10

Click Finish. The GEIUB is configured.

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)


This section describes how to add a GEPUG in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEPUG is responsible for the FR transmission on the Gb interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The GEPUG is configured when the Gb interface


uses the FR transmission mode.

68P02909W07-A

5-55

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GEPUG.

Preparation
Table 5-18

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GEPUG

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

14

BSC internal planning

FuncType

Gb interface board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GEPUG

BSC internal planning

Work Mode

E1

Negotiation with the peer

Active/Standby Mode

Selected

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Frame Format

CRC4_MULTIFRAME

Negotiation with the peer

The following procedure describes how to configure a pair of GEPUGs (in active/standby
mode) in the GMPS.

Procedure
Procedure 5-14

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select the cabinet where the
GMPS/GEPS is located from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 14-15 in the GMPS.


Continued

5-56

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-14
3

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-43.

Figure 5-43

Add Board dialog box

Set FuncType to Gb interface board, and set Board Type to GEPUG. Set the parameters
by referring to Table 5-18. Then click Finish. A pair of GEPUGs is added.

Right-click GEPUG.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-57

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-14
6

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-44.

Figure 5-44

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GEPUG

Continued

5-58

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Procedure 5-14
7

Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR) (Continued)

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-18, and then click Next. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-45.

Figure 5-45

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-port

Set Frame Format by referring to Table 5-18. For other parameters in the dialog box shown
in Figure 5-45, use the default settings or modify them according to actual requirements.

Click Finish. The GEPUG is configured.

Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP)


This section describes how to add a GFGUG in the GMPS/GEPS and configure its attributes. The
GEPUG is responsible for the IP transmission on the Gb interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The GFGUG is configured when the Gb interface


uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites
The subrack has empty slots to hold the GFGUG.

68P02909W07-A

5-59

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Preparation
Table 5-19

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

FuncType

Gb interface board

BSC internal planning

Board Type

GFGUG

BSC internal planning

Net Mode

Independent Mode

BSC internal planning

Port Type

FE

BSC internal planning

Load Key

Server

BSC internal planning

Port Active Status

ACTIVE

BSC internal planning

Device IP

Logical IP Address

192.168.70.2

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.70.132

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Destination IP Address

192.168.80.0

Negotiation with the peer

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.128

Negotiation with the peer

Gateway

192.168.70.136

Negotiation with the peer

Port IP

BSC Router

The following procedure describes how to configure a GFGUG in the GMPS.

Procedure

Adding a board.
a.

On the BSC Local Manager, click the BSC Device Panel tab. Select a cabinet
number from the Current Cabinet drop-down list.

b.

Right-click an empty slot among slots 18-27 in the GMPS.

c.

Choose Add Board. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46.

5-60

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 5-46

Configuring the BSC Boards

Add Board dialog box

d.

Set FuncType to Gb interface board, and set Board Type to GFGUG. Set the
parameters by referring to Table 5-19.

e.

Click Finish. The GFGUG is added.

Configure the board attributes.


a.

Right-click GFGUG.

b.

Choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-47.

68P02909W07-A

5-61

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-47

c.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-GFGUG

Set Load Key by referring to Table 5-19, and then click Next. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-48.

Figure 5-48

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Ethernet port

5-62

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

d.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Set the attributes of the Ethernet port by referring to Table 5-19.

NOTE
When you modify the attribute of a port on the GFGUG, the port becomes
faulty temporarily. If the board is in active/standby mode, an active/standby
switchover is performed automatically.

e.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49

f.

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-Qos

Set the QoS attributes according to actual requirements, and then click Next. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-50.

68P02909W07-A

5-63

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-50

Configure Board Attributes dialog box-physical link detection

g.

Set the physical link detection parameters according to actual requirements.

h.

Click Finish. The GFGUG attributes are configured.

Configure the device IP address.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure Device IP from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-51.

5-64

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 5-51

b.

Configuring the BSC Boards

Configure Device IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-52.

Figure 5-52

Add Device IP dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-65

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

c.

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-19. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-51.

NOTE
Device IP address is the logical IP address for communication. This IP
address is valid for the IP addresses of all the ports of the board. The device
IP addresses for the interface boards operating in active/standby mode
are the same. The IP addresses for the interface boards not operating in
active/standby mode should not be arranged in the same network segment.

d.

Click Finish. The device IP address is configured.

Configure the IP address of the Ethernet port.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure Ethernet Port IP from the shortcut menu.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-53.

Figure 5-53

b.

Configure Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-54.

5-66

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Boards

Figure 5-54

c.

Add Ethernet Port IP dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-19. Click OK to return to the dialog box
shown in Figure 5-53.

NOTE
If Port Type is set to FE, one board can be configured with eight port
IP addresses on different network segments. If Port Type is set to GE,
one board can be configured with two port IP addresses on different
network segments. The port IP address and the device IP address must
be configured on different network segments. The port IP addresses for
the active and standby GFGUGs must be configured on the same network
segment.

d.

Click Finish. The port IP address is configured.

Configure the BSC router.


a.

Right-click GFGUG and choose Configure BSC Router from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-55.

68P02909W07-A

5-67

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Boards

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Figure 5-55

b.

Configure BSC Router dialog box

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-56.

Figure 5-56

Add BSC Router dialog box

5-68

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

c.

Configuring the BSC EAC

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-19.

CAUTION
Destination IP Address must be set to the network address, and it cannot
be configured on the same network segment with the port IP address of
the GFGUG. Otherwise, Destination IP Address is invalid. Gateway IP
Address and the port IP address of the GFGUG must be configured on
the same network segment.
d.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-55.

e.

Click Finish. The BSC router is configured.

Configuring the BSC EAC


This section describes how to configure the EAC for the BSC cabinet. The EAC gathers Boolean
values, analog values, and alarm threshold information and reports them to the LMT.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The EAC should be configured when the BSC


needs to collect external alarm information.

NOTE
One BSC cabinet can be configured with only one EAC.

Prerequisites
The subrack that holds the EAC is configured.

Preparation
None.

Procedure
Procedure 5-15
1

Configuring the BSC EAC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of a subrack.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-69

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC EAC

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-15
2

Configuring the BSC EAC (Continued)

Choose Configure BSC EAC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-57.

Figure 5-57

Add BSC EAC dialog box-switch

NOTE
Use the default settings of the parameters or modify them according to actual
requirements.
Continued

5-70

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Procedure 5-15
3

Configuring the BSC EAC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-58.

Figure 5-58

Add BSC EAC dialog box-analog and alarm threshold

NOTE
Use the default settings of the parameters or modify them according to actual
requirements.
4

Click Finish. The BSC EAC is configured.

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link


This section describes how to configure the communication links between the GMPS and the
GEPS or between GEPSs. The links are responsible for the TDM switching between subracks.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

5-71

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

NOTE

A maximum of three subrack communication links can be configured between


two subracks. In actual situations, an active and a standby communication links
are, in general, configured between subracks.

The communication between subracks is achieved through the GTNU in each


subrack. There are six external ports, numbered TDM0TDM5, on the panel of
the GTNU. Only one subrack communication link uses each port.

Prerequisites
The two subracks between which the communication link is to be established are configured.

Preparation

NOTE
Assume that the BSC is configured with one GMPS and two GEPSs. The GMPS is
subrack 0, and GEPSs are subracks 1 and 3.

Table 5-20 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Table 5-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

0 (active), 1 (standby)

BSC internal planning

5-72

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Table 5-22 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the
communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack1 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 No.

BSC internal planning

Subrack1 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

Subrack2 TDM No.

2 (active), 3 (standby)

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to configure the mesh interconnection between subracks
through TDM ports.

Procedure

Configure the communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-59.

Figure 5-59

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-73

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

c.

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-60.

Figure 5-60

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-20.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 1 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GMPS 0 and GEPS 1.

5-74

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Configure the communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-61.

Figure 5-61

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-75

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

c.

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-62.

Figure 5-62

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-21.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GMPS 0 and GEPS 3 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GMPS 0 and GEPS 3.

5-76

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

Configure the communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3.


a.

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

b.

Choose Configure Subrack Communication Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-63.

Figure 5-63

Configure Subrack Communication Link dialog box

68P02909W07-A

5-77

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Subrack Communication Link

c.

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-64.

Figure 5-64

Add Subrack Communication Link dialog box

d.

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-22.

e.

Click OK. The first communication link between GEPS 1 and GEPS 3 is configured.

f.

Repeat Step a through Step e to configure the second communication link between
GEPS 1 and GEPS 3.

5-78

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the BSC Links (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Configuring the BSC Links (IP Transmission Mode on


the A Interface)

This section describes how to configure the M3UA links on the A Interface when the A Interface
uses the IP transmission mode. The M3UA links are responsible for the signaling transmission
between the BSC and the MSC.

Configuring Links on the A Interface


This section describes how to configure the M3UA link set, M3UA link, and M3UA route on the A
Interface for the communication between the BSC and the MSC.

Configuring the M3UA Link Set on page 5-79

Configuring the M3UA Link on page 5-81

Configuring the M3UA Route on page 5-84

Configuring the M3UA Link Set


This section describes how to configure the M3UA link set on the A Interface.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites
The M3UA entities are configured. For details, refer to Configuring the
M3UA Entities on page 5-5.

Preparation
Table 5-23
link set

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3UA

Parameter

Example

Source

Linkset Name

BSC internal planning

Adjacent Destination Entity Name

MSC001

BSC internal planning

68P02909W07-A

5-79

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure
Procedure 5-16

Configuring the M3UA Link Set

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure M3UA Data>Configure M3UA Linkset from the shortcut menu. A
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-65.

Figure 5-65

Configure M3UA Linkset dialog box

Continued

5-80

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 5-16
3

Configuring the M3UA Link Set (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-66.

Figure 5-66

Add M3UA Link Set dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-23.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-65.

Click Finish. The M3UA link set is configured.

Configuring the M3UA Link


This section describes how to configure the M3UA link on the A Interface for the IP transmission
between the BSC and the MSC.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The DSP for the M3UA entity is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the M3UA
Entities on page 5-5.

The subrack-OSP mapping is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the Subrack-OSP
Mapping on page 5-12.

The GMPS/GEPS is configured with the GXPUM. For details, refer to Configuring the
GXPUM on page 3-24.

68P02909W07-A

5-81

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

The M3UA link set is configured.

The GMPS/GEPS is configured with the GFGUA/GOGUA. For details, refer to Configuring
the GFGUA/GOGUA on page 5-41.

Preparation
Table 5-24

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3UA link

Parameter

Example

Source

Linkset Name

BSC internal planning

GXPUM/GXPUT Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

GXPUM/GXPUT Slot No.

Negotiation with the peer

CPU No.

BSC internal planning

Local Port No.

BSC internal planning

Local Address 1

192.168.10.2

Negotiation with the peer

Peer Address 1

192.168.30.1

BSC internal planning

Peer Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 5-17

Configuring the M3UA Link

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GFGUA in the GMPS.


Continued

5-82

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 5-17
2

Configuring the M3UA Link (Continued)

Choose Configure M3UA Link>Add M3UA Link from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-67.

Figure 5-67

Configure M3UA Link dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-83

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Procedure 5-17
3

Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Configuring the M3UA Link (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-68.

Figure 5-68

Add M3UA Link dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-24.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-67.

Click Finish. The M3UA link is configured.

Configuring the M3UA Route


This section describes how to configure the M3UA route for the IP transmission between the
BSC and the MSC.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The DSP for the M3UA entity is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the M3UA
Entities on page 5-5.

The M3UA link set is configured.

5-84

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring Links on the A Interface

Preparation
Table 5-25
route

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3UA

Parameter

Example

Source

Destination Entity Name

MSC001

Negotiation with the peer

Linkset Name

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-18

Configuring the M3UA Route

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure M3UA Data>Configure M3UA Route from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-69.

Figure 5-69

Configure M3UA Route dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-85

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-18
3

Chapter 5:

Configuring the M3UA Route (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-70.

Figure 5-70

Add M3UA Route dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-25.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-69..

Click Finish. The M3UA route is configured.

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission


Mode on the Gb Interface)
This section describes how to configure the NSE, BC, SGSN Clock, NSVC, and PTPBVC on the
Gb interface for the FR transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.

Configuring the NSE on page 3-101

Configuring the BC on page 3-103

Configuring the SGSN Clock on page 3-106

Configuring the NSVC on page 3-108

Configuring the PTPBVC on page 3-111

5-86

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Configuring the NSE


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Entity (NSE) on the Gb interface
and determine the subnetwork protocol type.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

When adding an NSE, set the NSE identifier, subnetwork protocol type, and
agent subrack number.

One BSC can be configured with a maximum of 128 NSEs. Multiple NSEs can be
assigned on the same agent subrack.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 5-26 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the SGSN

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over FR

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-19

Configuring the NSE

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-87

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-19
2

Chapter 5:

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure NSE from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-71.

Figure 5-71

Configure NSE dialog box

Continued

5-88

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-19
3

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-72.

Figure 5-72

Add NSE dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-26. Click OK to return to the dialog box shown
in Figure 5-71.

Click Finish. The NSE is configured.

Configuring the BC
This section describes how to configure the bearer channel (BC) on the Gb interface when the
Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode. The BC is responsible for the data transmission
between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The BC is configured only when the Gb interface


uses the FR transmission mode.

NOTE
BC refers to a fixed number of timeslots on the E1/T1 when the Gb interface uses the
FR transmission mode.

68P02909W07-A

5-89

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Chapter 5:

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

Preparation
Table 5-27 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BC on
the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Frame Relay Protocol Type

Q933

Negotiation with the peer

Occupied Timeslot

T1-T16

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N391)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N392)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (N393)

Negotiation with the peer

DTE Parameter (T391)

10

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 5-20

Configuring the BC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

5-90

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-20
2

Configuring the BC (Continued)

Choose Configure BC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-73.

Figure 5-73

Configure BC dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-91

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-20
3

Chapter 5:

Configuring the BC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-74.

Figure 5-74

Add BC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-27.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-73.

Click Finish. The BC is configured.

Configuring the SGSN Clock


This section describes how to configure the SGSN clock when the Gb interface uses the FR
transmission mode. The SGSN clock is responsible for the synchronization between the GEPUG
and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The SGSN clock is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the FR transmission mode.

5-92

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

NOTE
The BC carries the clock signal on the SGSN side. Configure the SGSN clock by
specifying the port of the BC.

Prerequisites

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

The BC is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the BC on page 3-103.

Preparation
Table 5-28
clock

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN

Parameter

Example

Source

Board Port No.

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-21

Configuring the SGSN Clock

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-93

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-21
2

Chapter 5:

Configuring the SGSN Clock (Continued)

Choose Config SGSN Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-75.

Figure 5-75

Configure SGSN Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-28.

Click Add. The SGSN clock is configured.

Configuring the NSVC


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Virtual Connection (NSVC) for
service transmission on the Gb interface when the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode.
The NSVC and the BC are bound together to provide the data transmission between the BSC
and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The NSVC is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the FR transmission mode.

5-94

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

NOTE

NSVC refers to the virtual connection on the NS layer. One NSVC is located on
the BC of one E1/T1 and belongs to one BC/NSE. One BC/NSE can be configured
with multiple NSVCs.

One NSVC corresponds to one PVC. When configuring an NSVC, specify the
corresponding PVC.

Prerequisites

The GEPUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEPUG (Gb over FR)
on page 3-55.

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-101.

The BC is configured.

Preparation
Table 5-29 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSVC Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Port Number

BSC internal planning

Bearer Channel ID

BSC internal planning

Data Link Connection Identifier

16

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 5-22

Configuring the NSVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEPUG.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-95

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-22
2

Chapter 5:

Configuring the NSVC (Continued)

Choose Configure NSVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-76.

Figure 5-76

Configure NSVC dialog box

Continued

5-96

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-22
3

Configuring the NSVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-77.

Figure 5-77

Add NSVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-29.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-76.

Click Finish. The NSVC on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the PTPBVC


This section describes how to configure the PTPBVC on the Gb interface to bind the GPRS cell
with the NSE.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
One GPRS cell can be configured with only one PTPBVC. One NSE can be configured
with multiple PTPBVCs.

68P02909W07-A

5-97

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Chapter 5:

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-101.

A GPRS cell is configured and the activity state of the cell is Activated.

Preparation
Table 5-30 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-23

Configuring the PTPBVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

5-98

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (FR Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-23
2

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure PTPBVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-78.

Figure 5-78

Configure PTBBVC dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-99

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-23
3

Chapter 5:

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-79.

Figure 5-79

Add PTPBVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-30.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-78.

Click Finish. The PTPBVC is configured.

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission


Mode on the Gb Interface)
This section describes how to configure the NSE, local NSVL, remote NSVL, and PTPBVC on the
Gb interface for the IP transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.

Configuring the NSE on page 5-101

Configuring the Local NSVL on page 5-103

Configuring the Remote NSVL on page 5-106

Configuring the PTPBVC on page 3-122

5-100

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Configuring the NSE


This section describes how to configure the Network Service Entity (NSE) on the Gb interface
and determine the subnetwork protocol type.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE

When adding an NSE, set the NSE identifier, subnetwork protocol type, and
agent subrack number.

One BSC can be configured with a maximum of 128 NSEs. Multiple NSEs can
be assigned on the same agent subrack.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 5-31 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the NSE
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

Agent Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

Subnetwork Protocol Type

Gb over IP

Network planning

NSE Capability (number of users)

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-24

Configuring the NSE

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-101

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-24
2

Chapter 5:

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure NSE from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-80.

Figure 5-80

Configure NSE dialog box

Continued

5-102

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-24
3

Configuring the NSE (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-81.

Figure 5-81

Add NSE dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-31.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-80.

Click Finish. The NSE is configured.

Configuring the Local NSVL


This section describes how to configure the local NSVL (NSVL on the BSC side) on the Gb
interface when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode. The local NSVL is responsible
for the data transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Local NSVL is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GFGUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on
page 3-59.

68P02909W07-A

5-103

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Chapter 5:

Preparation
Table 5-32 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the local
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Local NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.70.1

Negotiation with the peer

UDP Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

PIU Subrack No.

BSC internal planning

PIU Slot No.

18

BSC internal planning

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 5-25

Configuring the Local NSVL

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GFGUG.


Continued

5-104

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-25
2

Configuring the Local NSVL (Continued)

Choose Configure Local NSVL from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-82.

Figure 5-82

Configure Local NSVL dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-105

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-25
3

Chapter 5:

Configuring the Local NSVL (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-83.

Figure 5-83

Add Local NSVL dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-32.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-82.

Click Finish. The local NSVL on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the Remote NSVL


This section describes how to configure the remote NSVL (NSVL on the SGSN side) on the Gb
interface when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode. The remote NSVL is responsible
for the data transmission between the BSC and the SGSN.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. The Remote NSVL is configured only when the Gb


interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured.

The GFGUG is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GFGUG (Gb over IP) on
page 3-59.

5-106

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Preparation
Table 5-33 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the remote
NSVL on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

Remote NSVL Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

NSE Identifier

Negotiation with the peer

IP Address

192.168.80.1

Negotiation with the peer

IP Port No.

Negotiation with the peer

Signaling Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Traffic Load Weight

100

Negotiation with the peer

Procedure
Procedure 5-26

Configuring the Remote NSVL

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure Remote NSVL from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-84.

Figure 5-84

Configure Remote NSVL dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-107

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-26
3

Chapter 5:

Configuring the Remote NSVL (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-85.

Figure 5-85

Add Remote NSVL dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-33.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-84.

Click Finish. The remote NSVL on the Gb interface is configured.

Configuring the PTPBVC


This section describes how to configure the PTPBVC on the Gb interface to bind the GPRS cell
with the NSE.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
One GPRS cell can be configured with only one PTPBVC. One NSE can be configured
with multiple PTPBVCs.

5-108

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Prerequisites

The NSE is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the NSE on page 3-115.

A GPRS cell is configured and the activity state of the cell is Activated.

Preparation
Table 5-34 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the PTPBVC
on the Gb interface
Parameter

Example

Source

NSE Identifier

BSC internal planning

BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

BSC internal planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-27

Configuring the PTPBVC

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-109

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)
Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-27
2

Chapter 5:

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Choose Configure PCU Data>Configure PTPBVC from the shortcut menu. A dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-86.

Figure 5-86

Configure PTPBVC dialog box

Continued

5-110

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Links on the Gb Interface (IP Transmission Mode on the Gb Interface)

Procedure 5-27
3

Configuring the PTPBVC (Continued)

Click Add. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-87.

Figure 5-87

Add PTPBVC dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-34.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 5-86.

Click Finish. The PTPBVC is configured.

68P02909W07-A

5-111

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the BSC Clock (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)


Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Chapter 5:

Configuring the BSC Clock (IP Transmission Mode on


the A Interface)

This section describes how to configure BSC clock signals when the A Interface uses the IP
transmission mode. The BSC clock signals are responsible for the synchronization of boards in
each subrack.

Configuring the System Clock


This section describes how to configure the system clock, that is, the input clock for the GGCU.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

NOTE
When the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode, the clock source for the BSC
can be extracted only by the GGCU from the BITS clock. The GGCU processes
the input clock and generates the 8 kHz clock, which is used as the transmission
synchronization clock and the time synchronization clock for the boards in the GMPS
or GEPS.

The BITS clock is of two types: 2 MHz and 2 Mbit/s.

The system clock has two priorities: priority 1 and priority 2. Priority 1 is
higher than priority 2.

Prerequisites

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The BITS clock is ready, or the line clock for the GMPS is configured.

Preparation
Table 5-35
clock

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system

Parameter

Example

Source

Priority

BSC internal planning

BSC internal planning


Continued

5-112

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the System Clock

Table 5-35 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system
clock (Continued)
Parameter

Example

Source

Source Type

2M external clock 0

BSC internal planning

2M external clock 1

BSC internal planning

2 MHz

BSC internal planning

2 Mbit/s

BSC internal planning

Source Sub-type

Procedure
Procedure 5-28

Configuring the System Clock

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click BSC.

Choose Configure System Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-88.

Figure 5-88

Configure System Clock dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

5-113

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Procedure 5-28

Configuring the System Clock (Continued)

CAUTION
Source Type and Work Mode cannot be configured in one operation. Configure
them separately. After configuring Source Type, exit the configuration wizard,
and then start the configuration wizard again to configure Work Mode.
3

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-35.

Click Finish. The system clock is configured.

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS


This section describes how to configure the 8 kHz clock provided by the backplane of the GGCU
as the 8K reference clock for the GMPS. The 8K reference clock serves as the synchronization
clock for the boards in the GMPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on
page 3-31.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The system clock is configured.

Preparation
Table 5-36 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K reference
clock for the GMPS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

GGCU Backplane

BSC internal planning

5-114

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Procedure
Procedure 5-29

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GMPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GMPS.

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-89.

Figure 5-89

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-36.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GMPS is configured.

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS


This section describes how to configure the 8 kHz clock provided by the GGCU as the 8K
reference clock for the GEPS. The 8K reference clock serves as the synchronization clock
for the boards in the GEPS.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

68P02909W07-A

5-115

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Prerequisites

The GSCU in the GEPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GSCU on page
3-31.

The GGCU in the GMPS is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GGCU on
page 3-33.

The system clock is configured.

Preparation
Table 5-37 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the 8K
reference clock for the GEPS
Parameter

Example

Source

8K Reference Clock Type

GGCU Panel

BSC internal planning

Procedure
Procedure 5-30
1

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click the edge of the GEPS.


Continued

5-116

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS

Procedure 5-30
2

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS (Continued)

Choose Configure 8K Reference Clock from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-90.

Figure 5-90

Configure GSCU 8K Reference Clock dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 5-37.

Click Finish. The 8K reference clock for the GEPS is configured.

Repeat step 1 through step 4 to configure the 8K reference clock for more GEPSs.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

5-117

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the 8K Reference Clock for the GEPS Chapter 5: Configuring the BSC (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

5-118

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

6
Configuring the BTS

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

6-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Configuring the BTS

This section describes how to configure a BTS for the BSC. This configuration enables the radio
transmit/receive function of the BTS and the radio coverage of the cells. The configuration
also enables the BSC to perform centralized control and management of the BTS and allocate
radio resources for the BTS.

6-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a BTS

Adding a BTS

This section describes how to add a BTS of the MOTO BTS family. The MOTO BTS family
consists of the HorizonMacro, the HorizonMacro2, the Horizon2Mini, and the Horizon2Micro.

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS


This section describes how to add a HorizonMacro BTS for the BSC, and how to configure the
site device attributes, cell basic attributes, and TRX attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The GEIUB/GOIUB is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB


on page 3-51.

There are idle ports on the GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS or GEPS.

The GXPUM is configured for the GMPS or GEPS where the GEIUB/GOIUB is located. For
changes in the document, refer to Configuring the GXPUM on page 3-24.

NOTE
The configuration of the HorizonMacro2 BTS is similar to that of HorozonMacro BTS.
There are four types of TRX board, the CTU, the SCTU2, the DCTU2, and the CCTU2.
On the CTU and the SCTU2, one physical TRX maps one logical TRX. On the DCTU2
and the CCTU2, one physical TRX maps two logical TRXs, and these two logical TRXs
must be configured in one cell. The HorizonMacro BTS supports configuration of the
CTU,the SCTU2, and the DCTU2. The HorizonMacro2 BTS supports configuration
of the CTU, the SCTU2, the DCTU2, and the CCTU2.

68P02909W07-A

6-3

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Preparation
Table 6-1

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Parameter
BTS attributes

Cell attributes

TRX attributes

Antenna feeder
attributes

Example

Source

Site Name

BTS 1

Network planning

Site Type

HorizonMacro

Network planning

Upper-Level Port No.

0 GEIUB Port

Network planning

Multiplexing Mode

4:1

Network planning

FlexAbis Mode

Fix

Network planning

Service Mode

TDM

Network planning

Config Ring

NO

Network planning

Config AbisByPass

NO

Network planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

Network planning

Frequency Band

GSM900

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

01

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

BCC

Network planning

NCC

Network planning

Cell Extension Type

Normal Cell

Network planning

Cell Type

Normal Cell

Network planning

TRX TYPE

CTU

Network planning

Assigned Cell

Cell 1

Network planning

Frequency
configuration

988 (main BCCH frequency),


994

Network planning

TRX configuration

TRX 0, TRX 1

Network planning

Antenna Select

ANT 0A/0B

Network planning

The following procedure describes how to add a HorizonMacro on the GEIUB in the GMPS
and configured with CTU.

6-4

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Procedure
Procedure 6-1
1

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Start the wizard for adding a BTS.

When adding a BTS for the first time, start the wizard for adding a BTS only on the
GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS or GEPS. On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUB
in the GMPS.

If a BTS already exists, add a cascaded BTS under this BTS. On the Management Tree
tab page, right-click a BTS.

Choose Add Site. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1

Add Site dialog box (1)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-5

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-1
3

Click Add Site. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Add New Site dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-1.

NOTE
Set Config Ring to Yes and click OK. The Set Rev Info dialog box is displayed.
The HorizonMacro and the HorizonMacro2 does not support the Config
AbisByPass function. For the HorizonMacro and the HorizonMacro2, Support
Separate is selected by default.
Continued

6-6

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Procedure 6-1
5

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3

Add Site dialog box (2)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-7

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-1
6

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Add Site dialog box (3)

Select a BTS, and then click Add Cell. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5

Adding a cell

Continued

6-8

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Procedure 6-1
8

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-1.

NOTE
To add more than one cell at a time, set Number of Cells. The added cells are
named the current Cell Name plus a number in sequence.
9

Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6

Add Site dialog box (4)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-9

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-1
10

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7

Add Site dialog box (5)

Continued

6-10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Procedure 6-1
11

Click Site Attributes. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8

12

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Site Device Attributes dialog box

In the dialog box shown in Figure 6-8, right-click an empty slot in the subrack2 and choose
Add Board>CTU from the shortcut menu. A CTU is added.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-1
13

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Right-click the added CTU and choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut
menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9

Binding Logical TRX dialog box

14

Set Assigned Cell by referring to Table 6-1.

15

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-8.


Continued

6-12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-1
16

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Choose the logical TRX on the CTU, and double-click. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10

Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box 1

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-13

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-1
17

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Click the Configure Site Board Attributes tab to display the tab page, as shown in
Figure 6-11.

Figure 6-11

Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box 2

18

Set Antenna Select by referring to Table 6-1.

19

Repeat step 12 through step 18 to configure more CTUs.

Continued

6-14

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-1

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

20

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-7.

21

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12

Add Site dialog box (6)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-15

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-1
22

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Click Cell Attributes. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13

Set Cell Attributes dialog box

Continued

6-16

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Procedure 6-1
23

Adding a HorizonMacro BTS (Continued)

Set the basic attributes of the cell by referring to Table 6-1.

NOTE

The CI of a cell must be unique.

If you select GPRS Support, the BSC must be configured with GDPUP.
If the BTS does not support the GPRS function or the GPRS services are
unavailable in the cell, do not select GPRS Support.

When you select EDGE Support, GPRS Support is selected automatically if


the GPRS function is not configured.

24

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-12.

25

Click Finish. The HorizonMacro is configured.

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS


This section describes how to add a Horizon2Mini BTS for the BSC, and how to configure the
site device attributes, cell basic attributes, and TRX attributes.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration, BSC capacity expansion

Mandatory/Optional

Mandatory

Prerequisites

The GEIUB/GOIUB is configured. For details, refer to Configuring the GEIUB/GOIUB


on page 3-51.

There are idle ports on the GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS or GEPS.

The GXPUM is configured for the GMPS or GEPS where the GEIUB/GOIUB is located. For
changes in the document, refer to Configuring the GXPUM on page 3-24.

NOTE
The configuration of the Horizon2Micro BTS is similar to that of HorozonMacro BTS.
There are four types of TRX board, the CTU, the SCTU2, the DCTU2, and the CCTU2.
On the CTU and the SCTU2, one physical TRX maps one logical TRX. On the DCTU2
and the CCTU2, one physical TRX maps two logical TRXs, and these two logical TRXs
must be configured in one cell.

68P02909W07-A

6-17

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Preparation
Table 6-2

Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a HorizonMacro BTS

Parameter
BTS attributes

Cell attributes

TRX attributes

Antenna feeder
attributes

Example

Source

Site Name

BTS 1

Network planning

Site Type

Horizon2Mini

Network planning

Upper-Level Port No.

0 GEIUB Port

Network planning

Multiplexing Mode

4:1

Network planning

FlexAbis Mode

Fix

Network planning

Service Mode

TDM

Network planning

Config Ring

NO

Network planning

Config AbisByPass

NO

Network planning

Cell Name

Cell 1

Network planning

Frequency Band

GSM900

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

01

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

BCC

Network planning

NCC

Network planning

Cell Extension Type

Normal Cell

Network planning

Cell Type

Normal Cell

Network planning

TRX TYPE

CTU

Network planning

Assigned Cell

Cell 1

Network planning

Frequency
configuration

988 (main BCCH frequency),


994

Network planning

TRX configuration

TRX 0, TRX 1

Network planning

Antenna Select

ANT 0A/0B

Network planning

The following procedure describes how to add a Horizon2Mini on the GEIUB in the GMPS,
and configured with CCTU2.

6-18

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Procedure
Procedure 6-2
1

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Start the wizard for adding a BTS.

When adding a BTS for the first time, start the wizard for adding a BTS only on the
GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS or GEPS. On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a GEIUB
in the GMPS.

If a BTS already exists, add a cascaded BTS under this BTS. On the Management Tree
tab page, right-click a BTS.

Choose Add Site. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14

Add Site dialog box (1)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-19

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-2
3

Click Add Site. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Add New Site dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-2.

NOTE
Set Config Ring to Yes and click OK. The Set Rev Info dialog box is displayed.
The HorizonMacro and the HorizonMacro2 does not support the Config
AbisByPass function. For the Horizon2Mini and the Horizon2Micro, Support
Separate is selected by default.
Continued

6-20

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-2
5

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16

Add Site dialog box (2)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-21

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-2
6

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Add Site dialog box (3)

Select a BTS, and then click Add Cell. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-18.

Figure 6-18

Adding a cell

Continued

6-22

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-2
8

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-2.

NOTE
To add more than one cell at a time, set Number of Cells. The added cells are
named the current Cell Name plus a number in sequence.
9

Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-19.

Figure 6-19

Add Site dialog box (4)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-23

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-2
10

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20

Add Site dialog box (5)

Continued

6-24

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-2
11

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Click Site Attributes. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21

12

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Site Device Attributes dialog box

In the dialog box shown in Figure 6-21, right-click an empty slot in the subrack2 and choose
Add Board>CCTU2 from the shortcut menu. A CCTU2 is added.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-25

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-2
13

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Right-click the added CCTU2 and choose Configure Board Attributes from the shortcut
menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22

Binding Logical TRX dialog box

14

Set Assigned Cell and the TRX by referring to Table 6-2.

15

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-21.


Continued

6-26

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-2
16

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Choose the logical TRX on the CCTU2, and double-click. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23

Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box (1)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-27

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-2
17

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Click the Configure Site Board Attributes tab to display the tab page, as shown in
Figure 6-24

Figure 6-24

Basic Attributes of Site Board dialog box (2)

18

Set Antenna Select by referring to Table 6-2.

19

Repeat step 12 through step 18 to configure more CTU boards.

20

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-20.


Continued

6-28

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-2
21

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-25.

Figure 6-25

Add Site dialog box (6)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-29

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-2
22

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Click Cell Attributes. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-26.

Figure 6-26

Set Cell Attributes dialog box

Continued

6-30

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS

Procedure 6-2
23

Adding a Horizon2Mini BTS (Continued)

Set the basic attributes of the cell by referring to Table 6-2.

NOTE

The CI of a cell must be unique.

If you select GPRS Support, the BSC must be configured with GDPUP.
If the BTS does not support the GPRS function or the GPRS services are
unavailable in the cell, do not select GPRS Support.

When you select EDGE Support, GPRS Support is selected automatically if


the GPRS function is not configured.

24

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-25.

25

Click Finish. The Horizon2Mini is configured.

68P02909W07-A

6-31

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Optional BTS Attributes

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Configuring the Optional BTS Attributes

This section describes how to configure the optional BTS attributes, such as site chain and
reciprocal relations between cells.

Configuring the Site Chain


This section describes how to configure a site chain to add a path between BTSs or between
a BTS and the BSC.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. A site chain should be added when there is


insufficient transmission paths between BTSs or between a
BTS and the BSC.

CAUTION
Do not add a site chain between BTSs that are configured on the GEIUB/GOIUB in
different subracks. If two BTSs are configured on two boards that are in different work
modes, a site chain cannot be established between the two BTSs. A site chain cannot
be configured for the BTS in IP transmission mode.

Prerequisites

The BTS has available ports.

The GEIUB/GOIUB has available ports.

Preparation
Table 6-3

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a site chain

Parameter

Example

Source

Subrack No.

Subrack 0

BSC internal planning

Board Slot No.

Slot 18

BSC internal planning

Port No.

1 GEIUB Port

BSC internal planning

Site Port No.

1 Site Port

BSC internal planning

The following procedure describes how to add a site chain between a DBS3036 site and a
GEIUB in the GMPS.

6-32

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Site Chain

Procedure
Procedure 6-3

Configuring the Site Chain

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click a BTS.

Choose Add or Delete Site Chain from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27

Add or Delete Site Chain dialog box (1)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-33

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Site Chain

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Procedure 6-3
3

Configuring the Site Chain (Continued)

Select the BTS and then click Add or Delete Chain. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28

Add and Delete Site Chain dialog box (2)

Continued

6-34

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-3
4

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Configuring the Site Chain (Continued)

Click New Port. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-29

Add Site Slave Chain dialog box

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-3.

Click OK to save the configurations and return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-28.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-27.

Click Finish. The configuration of a site chain is complete.

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells


This section describes how to configure the reciprocal relations between cells to meet the
requirements of inter-cell handovers.

Configuring the 2G External Cell on page 6-35

Configuring the 3G External Cell on page 6-39

Configuring the Adjacent Cells on page 6-42

Configuring the 2G External Cell


This section describes how to add a 2G external cell for the BSC and configure the attributes
of the cell.

68P02909W07-A

6-35

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. A 2G external cell should be configured when a


BSC cell has to be handed over to a 2G external cell.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 6-4
cell

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a 2G external

Parameter

Example

Source

Cell Name

2G External Cell-1

Network planning

Layer of the Cell

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

01

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

BCCH FD

88

Network planning

BCC

Network planning

NCC

Network planning

Cell Priority

Prior-1

Network planning

Co-MSC

Yes

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 6-4

Configuring the 2G External Cell

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click 2G External Cells.


Continued

6-36

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-4
2

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Configuring the 2G External Cell (Continued)

Choose Add 2G External Cell from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30

Add 2G External Cell dialog box

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-37

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Procedure 6-4
3

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Configuring the 2G External Cell (Continued)

Click Add ExtCell. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-31.

Figure 6-31

Configure 2G external cell Attributes

NOTE
To add 2G external cells in batches, set the number of 2G external cells in

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-4.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-30.

Click Finish. The configuration of a 2G external cell is complete.

6-38

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Configuring the 3G External Cell


This section describes how to add a 3G external cell for the BSC and configure the attributes
of the cell.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. A 3G external cell should be configured when a


BSC cell has to be handed over to a 3G external cell.

Prerequisites
None.

Preparation
Table 6-5
cell

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a 3G external

Parameter

Example

Source

Cell Name

3G External Cell-1

Network planning

MCC

460

Network planning

MNC

10

Network planning

LAC

8240

Network planning

CI

Network planning

RNC ID

Network planning

DL UARFCN

10680

Network planning

Primary scrambling code

10

Network planning

Diversity

NO

Network planning

Procedure
Procedure 6-5

Configuring the 3G External Cell

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click 3G External Cells.


Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-39

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Procedure 6-5
2

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Configuring the 3G External Cell (Continued)

Choose Add 3G External Cell from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 6-32.

Figure 6-32

Add 3G External Cell dialog box

Continued

6-40

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-5
3

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Configuring the 3G External Cell (Continued)

Click Add ExtCell. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-33.

Figure 6-33

Configure 3G External Cell Attributes dialog box

NOTE
To add 3G external cells in batches, set the number of 3G external cells in

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-5.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-32.

Click Finish. The 3G external cell is configured.

68P02909W07-A

6-41

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Configuring the Adjacent Cells


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional adjacent cell or a single directional
adjacent cell for a cell to achieve handovers between cells in a BSC or between cells in different
BSCs.
Scenario

BSC initial configuration

Mandatory/Optional

Optional. Adjacent cells should be configured when a cell


has to be handed over to another cell in the same BSC or to
another cell in a different BSC.

NOTE

The cells in the BSC can be set to bidirectional adjacent cells or single
directional adjacent cells.

The cells in another BSC can be set to only single directional adjacent cells
of the cells in the BSC.
Adjacent cells indicate the reciprocal relations between cells. The cell where an MS
is handed over from is called originating cell. The cell where an MS is handed over to
is called neighbor cell or adjacent cell.

Prerequisites
A 2G or 3G external cell is configured.

Preparation
Table 6-6

Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring adjacent cells

Parameter

Type of Adjacent Cell

Example

Source

Source cell

Cell 1

Network planning

Adjacent cell

Bidirectional neighbor cell

Cell 2

Network planning

Unidirectional neighbor
cell

2G external cell-13G
external cell-1

Network planning

This procedure describes how to configure adjacent cells for Cell 1.

6-42

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Procedure
Procedure 6-6

Configuring the Adjacent Cells

On the BSC Local Manager, right-click Cell 1.

Choose Configure Adjacent Cell. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34

Configuring Adjacent Cells dialog box (1)

Continued

68P02909W07-A

6-43

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Procedure 6-6
3

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

Configuring the Adjacent Cells (Continued)

Select Cell1 from the Cell view list box and add it to theSelected cell list box. Click Next.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-35.

Figure 6-35

Configuring Adjacent Cells dialog box (2)

Continued

6-44

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Procedure 6-6
4

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Configuring the Adjacent Cells (Continued)

Select Cell 1 and click Set Adjacent Cells. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 6-36.

Figure 6-36

Configuring relations between adjacent cells

Set the parameters by referring to Table 6-6.

Click OK to return to the dialog box shown in Figure 6-35.

Click Finish. The adjacent cells are configured.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

6-45

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Configuring the Reciprocal Relations Between Cells

Chapter 6: Configuring the BTS

6-46

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

7
Reference to BSC Data Configuration

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

7-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Reference to BSC Data Configuration

This provides the principles and reference information of BSC data configuration.

7-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (BM/TC Separated)

Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (BM/TC


Separated)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC cabinets, subracks, and boards
when the BM and TC are configured in different subracks.

Cabinet
The configuration principles of BSC cabinets are as follows:

The GBCR cabinet is configured on the BSC side and only one GBCR cabinet can be
configured. The GBSR cabinet is configured on the BSC side or on the MSC side and up
to two GBSR cabinets can be configured.

By default the GBCR cabinet, numbered 0, is displayed on the LMT. The newly added
cabinets are numbered in sequence.

The cabinet placed on the BSC side is called local cabinet. It holds the GEPS and the GTCS.

The cabinet placed on the MSC side is called the remote cabinet. It holds only the GTCS.

Each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box and a management subrack
for the power distribution box.

Subrack
The configuration principles of BSC subracks are as follows:

The GMPS is mandatory in the BSC. Each BSC must be configured with one GMPS and
zero to three GEPSs.

By default, a GMPS is configured in cabinet 0. The newly added subracks must be


configured from bottom up.

The GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS, including the boards in these subracks, must be configured
in order.

All the GTCSs must be configured in only the local cabinet or in only the remote cabinet. In
the local cabinet, a maximum of two GTCSs can be configured; in the remote subrack, a
maximum of three GTCSs can be configured.

Each subrack is configured with a fan box. The fan box is added automatically when
you add a subrack.

Two GGCUs (in active/standby mode), two GTNUs (in active/standby mode), two GSCUs (in
active/standby mode), and two GOMUs (in active/standby mode) are displayed in the GMPS
by default on the LMT. By default, two GTNUs (in active/standby mode) and two GSCUs (in
active/standby mode) are displayed in the GEPS/GTCS on the LMT. These boards can be
deleted only when you delete the subracks where these boards are located.

68P02909W07-A

7-3

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Board

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Board
The configuration principles of BSC boards are as follows:

The A Interface, Abis interface, Ater interface, and Gb interface support the E1/T1, and
STM-1 transmission modes. The A Interface also supports the FE/GE transmission mode.
The E1/T1, STM-1, and FE/GE transmission modes can coexist in one subrack. To facilitate
configuration and maintenance, Motorola recommends that one interface use one type of
interface boards. Do not configure two types of interface boards together.

To ensure the system reliability, Motorola recommends that all the boards, except for the
GDPUX/GDPUP, be configured in active/standby mode.

The GOIUA, GOIUB, and GOUIT support the APS function. If the GOIUB, and GOUIT are in
active/standby mode, the APS function is selected by default.

The GGCU, GSCU, GTNU, and GOMU are displayed by default on the LMT. Table 7-1 lists the
configuration principles of the boards except for the boards displayed by default on the LMT.

Table 7-1

Configuration principles of BSC boards

Board

Configuration Principles

GDPUX

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The number of boards to be


configured depends on the system specifications.

The resource pool mode is used.

GEIUA/GOIUA

Configured in the GTCS. The number of boards to be configured depends


on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby mode.
The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GEIUA and the GOIUA can be configured in one subrack if required.

GEIUB/GOIUB

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby mode.
The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GEIUB and the GOIUB can be configured in one subrack if required.

GEIUT/GOIUT

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The number of boards to be


configured depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby mode.
The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GEIUT and the GOIUT can be configured in one subrack if required.
Continued

7-4

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Table 7-1

Board

Configuration principles of BSC boards (Continued)

Board

Configuration Principles

GEPUG/GFGUG

The GFGUG/GEPUG is configured in the GMPS/GEPS when the BSC is


configured with the GDPUP.

When the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode, the GEPUG is


configured; when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode, the
GFGUG is configured.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby mode.
The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GDPUP is configured in slots 8-10 of the GMPS/GEPS .

The resource pool mode is used.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby mode.
The active/standby mode is recommended.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby mode.
The active/standby mode is recommended.

GDPUP

GXPUM

GXPUT

NOTE
On the BSC Local Manager, the types of boards that can be configured depend on
the type of the subrack that holds the boards and the serial numbers of slots in the
subrack. Table 7-1 provides the recommended configurations of the boards. Modify
the configurations according to actual requirements.

68P02909W07-A

7-5

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (BM/TC Separated)

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission


(BM/TC Separated)

This section describes the configuration principles of BSC communication links and signaling
links when the BM and TC are configured in different subracks.

Subrack Communication Link


The configuration principles are as follows:

The subrack communication links are configured between the GMPS and the GEPS,
between GEPSs, or between GTCSs.

A maximum of three subrack communication links can be configured between two subracks.

The communication between subracks is achieved through the GTNU in each subrack.
There are six external ports, numbered TDM0TDM5, on the panel of the GTNU. Only one
subrack communication link can use each port.

7-6

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Semipermanent Link

Semipermanent Link
The configuration principles are as follows:

The semipermanent link is configured between the GMPS and the GEPS, between GEPSs,
or between GTCSs.

For a semipermanent link, at least one of the following pairs of numbers must be different:
The In-BSC subrack number and the Out-BSC subrack number
The In-BSC slot number and the Out-BSC slot number
The In-BSC port number and the Out-BSC port number

If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 16 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No. and Out-BSC
Timeslot No. must be set to 0, 2, 4, or 6.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 32 kbit/s, the In-BSC Timeslot No., and the
Out-BSC Timeslot No. must be set to 0 or 4.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 64 kbit/s, the In-BSC Timeslot No., and the
Out-BSC Timeslot No. must be set to 0.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 8 kbit/s, the In-BSC Timeslot No., and the
Out-BSC Timeslot No. can be set to any value.

The timeslots on semipermanent links can be multiplexed onto the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 timeslot
on one BSC port. The timeslots on semipermanent links and the monitoring timeslots can
be multiplexed onto the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 timeslot on one BSC port.

The specified BSC port timeslot for a semipermanent link must be NULL or FlexTS.

A maximum of 200 semipermanent links can be configured.

Ater Connection Path


The number of Ater connection paths are as follows:

A maximum of 32 Ater connection paths can be configured between two GEIUTs.

A maximum of 64 Ater connection paths can be configured between two GOIUTs.

Ater Signaling Link


The configuration principles are as follows:

The Ater signaling links must be configured when the GTCS is configured on the MSC side.

Each GEIUT/GOIUT in the GMPS/GEPS can be configured with up to eight 64 kbit/s Ater
signaling links.

68P02909W07-A

7-7

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Ater OML

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Ater OML
The configuration principles are as follows:

The Ater OML must be configured when the GTCS is configured on the MSC side.

A maximum of two Ater OMLs can be configured between the GMPS and the main GTCS.
The timeslot masks of the two Ater OMLs can be different.

At least four consecutive timeslots must be selected for the timeslot mask of each Ater
OML.

A Interface E1/T1
The configuration principles are as follows:

The CICs of the A Interface E1/T1 range from 0 to 65535. These CICs do not have to be
consecutive. You can manually change the number of the CIC.

The CICs (except for 65535) of the A Interface E1/T1 must be unique in a signaling point.

The CICs of the A Interface E1/T1 between the BSC and different MSCs can be duplicate.
For example, the CICs between the BSC and MSC 1, between the BSC and MSC 2, and
between the BSC and MGW 1 can be duplicate.

The CICs of the A Interface E1 between the BSC and multiple MGWs (DPC groups) can
be duplicate. For example, the CICs between the BSC and MGW 1, and between the
BSC and MGW 2 can be duplicate.

If multiple E1s/T1s of the BSC are connected to one MGW, the CIC of each A Interface
E1 must be unique.

SS7 Signaling Point

Each signaling point code must be unique.

The BSC can be configured with up to 4 OSPs, 32 STPs, and 32 DSPs.

The OSP, STP, and DSP must be unique.

The DPC in each DPC group must be unique.

7-8

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

SS7 Signaling Link

SS7 Signaling Link

The SS7 signaling link supports two types of rates: 64 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s. The 2 Mbit/s
signaling link can be 2.048 Mbit/s or N x 64 kbit/s (1<N<32). One BSC supports only
one rate type.

Each SS7 signaling link can be configured with different bandwidths. The SS7 signaling
links are in load sharing mode. Therefore, Motorola recommends that all the SS7 signaling
links be configured with the same bandwidth. Each 2 Mbit/s signaling link can be the
combination of any timeslots (except for timeslot 0) on an E1.

One pair of signaling points can be configured with up to sixteen 64 kbit/s SS7 signaling
links. In configuration, to balance the load, the recommended number of SS7 signaling
links is 2 to the power of N, that is, 2, 4, 8, or 16.

One signaling point must be configured with at least two 2 Mbit/s signaling links, and it
is recommended that the two signaling links be configured on different E1/T1 cables or
different STM-1 cables.

If the GTCS maps one DSP, each GMPS/GEPS can be configured with a maximum of sixteen
64 kbit/s SS7 signaling links; if the GTCS maps multiple DSPs, each GMPS/GEPS can be
configured with a maximum of thirty-two 64 kbit/s SS7 signaling links.

Each GMPS/GEPS can be configured with up to eight 2 kbit/s SS7 signaling links.

In E1 transmission mode, the total bandwidth of SS7 signaling links cannot exceed 4
Mbit/s. In T1 transmission mode, the total bandwidth of SS7 signaling links cannot exceed
3 Mbit/s. In E1 transmission mode, if 16 timeslots is selected for each signaling link of 64
kbit/s, the total bandwidth amounts to 1 Mbit/s. A maximum of three signaling links of 64
kbit/s can be configured because the total bandwidth cannot exceed 4 Mbit/s.

Gb Interface Link
For details on the configuration principles of Gb interface links, refer to Configuration Principles
of the Gb Interface Links on page 7-31.

Links on the A and Ater Interfaces


When the BM and TC are configured in different subracks, the GTCS can be configured on the
BSC side or on the MSC side and the related links must be configured on the A or Ater interface.
Table 7-2 lists the links that should be configured on the A and Ater interfaces.

Table 7-2

Links on the A and Ater Interfaces

Interface

GTCS Configured on the BSC Side

GTCS Configured on the MSC Side

A interface

SS7 Signaling Link

SS7 Signaling Link

Ater interface

Ater OM link and Ater signaling link

68P02909W07-A

7-9

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Links on the A and Ater Interfaces

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Figure 7-1 lists the links that should be configured on the A and Ater interfaces when the
GTCS is placed on the BSC side. The GMPS communicates with the main GTCS through the
GSCU to transmit SS7, internal signaling, and OM information. Through the GSCU, the SS7 is
transparently transmitted to the GXPUM/GXPUT in the GMPS/GEPS for further processing.

Figure 7-1

Links on the A and Ater interfaces (GTCS configured on the BSC side)

Figure 7-2 lists the links that should be configured on the A and Ater interfaces when the GTCS
is placed on the MSC side. Through the Ater interface, the SS7 is transparently transmitted to
the GEIUT/GXPUM/GXPUT in the GMPS/GEPS for further processing.

7-10

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Figure 7-2

Timeslots on the Ater Interface

Links on the A and Ater interfaces (GTCS configured on the MSC side)

Timeslots on the Ater Interface


This provides the principles of the timeslot assignment on the OM links and signaling links
on the Ater interface.

OM Timeslots and Signaling Timeslots on the Ater Interface


When the BM and the TC are configured in different subracks, configure the related Ater
interface data.
When the GTCS is configured on the BSC side, the timeslots and the bandwidth occupied by the
SS7 that is transmitted through the Ater interface are the same as the timeslots and bandwidth
occupied by the SS7 that is transmitted through the A Interface.

68P02909W07-A

7-11

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Timeslots on the Ater Interface

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

When the GTCS is configured on the MSC side, the Ater OM links, the Ater signaling links, and
the transparently transmitted SS7 occupy the Ater interface timeslots. The bandwidth of the
timeslots occupied by the SS7 on the Ater interface is the same as that on the A Interface. The
bandwidth of the interface timeslots occupied by the Ater OM links and Ater signaling links is
subject to the BSC configuration. Table 7-3 lists the bandwidth of OM timeslots and signaling
timeslots on the Ater interface.

Table 7-3

Bandwidth of OM timeslots and signaling timeslots on the Ater interface

BSC Configuration

Bandwidth of Ater OM Links

Bandwidth of Ater Signaling Links

GMPS + GTCS

16 timeslots of 64 kbit/s

The GMPS is configured with four


timeslots of 64 kbit/s

GMPS + GEPS + 2
GTCSs

16 timeslots of 64 kbit/s

Each BM subrack is configured


with four timeslots of 64 kbit/s

GMPS + 2 GEPSs + 3
GTCSs

31 timeslots of 64 kbit/s

Each BM subrack is configured


with four timeslots of 64 kbit/s

GMPS + 3 GEPSs + 4
GTCSs

31 timeslots of 64 kbit/s

Each BM subrack is configured


with four timeslots of 64 kbit/s

GMPS + GEPS + GTCS

16 timeslots of 64 kbit/s

Each BM subrack is configured


with four timeslots of 64 kbit/s

GMPS + 3 GEPS + 2
GTCS

31 timeslots of 64 kbit/s

Each BM subrack is configured


with eight timeslots of 64 kbit/s

NOTE
The GMPS and the GEPS are collectively known as the BM subrack.

Traffic Timeslots on the Ater Interface


The traffic timeslots on the Ater interface are assigned dynamically.
Except for the timeslots occupied by the Ater OMLs and Ater signaling links, all the other
timeslots on the Ater interface are traffic timeslots that form a resource pool. The units of the
resource pool are 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots. All the idle sub-timeslots form a FIFO queue. If
required, the sub-timeslots are removed from the queue.
For example, to establish a call, the GEIUT in the GTCS selects a 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot (head
element of the FIFO queue) that is idle for the longest time from the resource pool as the Ater
path for the call. When the call is terminated, the sub-timeslot is released to the resource
pool as the tail of the FIFO queue.

7-12

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (BM/TC Separated)

Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (BM/TC


Separated)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC clock when the BM and TC are
configured in different subracks.

GMPS/GEPS Clock
The GGCU in the GMPS traces the upper-level clock, and then provides clock signals for the
GMPS and the GEPS.
The reference clock for the GGCU is of two types: the line clock extracted from the Ater
interface by the GMPS and the BITS clock. The BITS clock is more accurate and more reliable.
Therefore, the BITS clock is preferred.

GTCS Clock
The GTCS traces the clock from the A Interface. Each GTCS extracts the line clock from the A
Interface. The configuration of the GTCS clock is the same regardless of whether the GTCS is
configured on the BSC side or on the MSC side.

Configuration principles of BSC clock


Table 7-4 lists the configuration principles of BSC clock.

Table 7-4

Configuration principles of BSC clock

Clock

Configuration Principles

Line clock of the


GTCS

If the GEIUA is configured in the GTCS, two line clock signals, line
0 and line 1, can be configured. If the GOIUA is configured in the
GTCS, only one line clock signal can be configured and the line clock
signal must be configured on port 0 on the GOIUA.

If the BSC is configured with more than one GTCS, the GTCSs
extract clock signals from the A interface as their line clock signals.

8K reference
clock of the GTCS

If the configured line clock signals are selected for the 8K reference
clock, do not delete any line clock.

Line clock of the


GMPS

The line clock of the GMPS must be configured on the Ater connection
path of the GMPS.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

7-13

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration principles of BSC clock

Table 7-4

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Configuration principles of BSC clock (Continued)

Clock

Configuration Principles

System clock

The configuration principles of the clock source priority are as follows:

The BSC provides up to four clock source priorities: priority 1 to


priority 4, from the highest to the lowest.

The clock source and the clock source priority have a one-to-one
mapping.

By default, the priority of the BITS clock is higher than that of the
line clock. Modify the priority of the clock source to set the priority
of the line clock higher than that of the BITS clock.

Switchover strategy of the current clock source: The BSC requires only
one clock source when running. Select a handover strategy to switch the
faulty clock source to a normal clock source. The clock source has three
working modes: AUTO, MANUAL, and FREE.

In AUTO mode, do not specify a clock source as the current clock


source. The BSC automatically selects a clock source with the
highest priority. For example, if the current clock source of priority
3 is faulty, the BSC selects the clock source of priority 4. After the
faulty clock source recovers, the BSC switches the clock source to
priority 3. If all the clock sources are faulty, the BSC switches to the
free-run mode. When the clock sources recover, the BSC switches
to the FREE mode.

In MANUAL mode, a clock source is specified as the current clock


source. The BSC cannot use another clock source even if this clock
source fails.

The FREE mode is the default clock working mode of the BSC.

7-14

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (BM/TC Combined)

Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (BM/TC


Combined)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC cabinets, subracks, and boards
with the BM/TC combined.

Cabinet
The configuration principles of BSC cabinets are as follows:

By default, the GBCR cabinet, numbered 0, is displayed on the LMT. The newly added
cabinets are numbered in sequence.

The GBSR cabinet is configured on the BSC side. It holds the GEPS and GMPS. A maximum
of three GBSR cabinets can be configured.

Each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box and a management subrack
for the power distribution box.

Subrack
The configuration principles of BSC subracks are as follows:

By default, the GMPS is displayed on the LMT. Zero to three GEPSs can be configured
according to actual requirements.

By default, a GMPS is configured in cabinet 0. The newly added subracks must be


configured from bottom up.

The GMPS and GEPS, including the boards in these subracks, must be configured in order.

Each subrack is configured with a fan box. The fan box is added automatically when
you add a subrack.

Two GGCUs (in active/standby mode), two GTNUs (in active/standby mode), two GSCUs
(in active/standby mode), and two GOMUs (in active/standby mode) are displayed in the
GMPS by default on the LMT. By default, two GTNUs (in active/standby mode) and two
GSCUs (in active/standby mode) are displayed in the GEPS on the LMT. These boards can
be deleted only when you delete the subracks where these boards are located.

68P02909W07-A

7-15

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Board

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Board
The configuration principles of BSC boards are as follows:

The A Interface, Abis interface, and Gb interface support the E1/T1 and STM-1 transmission
modes. The A Interface also supports the GE/FE transmission mode. The E1/T1, STM-1,
and GE/FE transmission modes can coexist in one subrack. To facilitate configuration and
maintenance, Motorola recommends that one interface use one type of interface boards.
Do not configure two types of interface boards together.

To ensure the system reliability, Motorola recommends that all the boards, except for the
GDPUX/GDPUP, be configured in active/standby mode.

The GOIUA, and GOIUB support the APS function. If the GOIUA and the GOIUB are in
active/standby mode, the APS function is selected by default.

The GGCU, GSCU, GTNU, and GOMU are displayed by default on the LMT. Table 7-5 lists the
configuration principles of the boards except for the boards displayed by default on the LMT.

Table 7-5

Configuration principles of BSC boards

Board

Configuration Principles

GDPUX

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of GDPUXs to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

The resource pool mode is used.

The number of boards to be configured depends on the system


specifications. The GEIUA and GOIUA are configured in the GMPS
and GEPS.

The GEIUA and the GOIUA can be configured in one subrack if required.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS.

The number of boards to be configured depends on the system


specifications. Configured in the GMPS/GEPS.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GEIUB and GOIUB can be configured in one subrack if required.

GEIUA/GOIUA

GEIUB/GOIUB

Continued

7-16

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Table 7-5

Board

Configuration principles of BSC boards (Continued)

Board

Configuration Principles

GFGUG/GEPUG

The GFGUG/GEPUG is configured in the GMPS/GEPS when the BSC is


configured with the built-in PCU.

When the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode, the GEPUG is


configured; when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode, the
GFGUG is configured.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GDPUP is configured when the BSC is configured with the built-in
PCU.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS.

The resource pool mode is used.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

GDPUP

GXPUM

GXPUT

NOTE
On the BSC Local Manager, the types of boards that can be configured depend on
the type of the subrack that holds the boards and the serial numbers of slots in the
subrack. Table 7-5 provides the recommended configurations of the boards. Modify
the configurations according to actual requirements.

68P02909W07-A

7-17

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (BM/TC Combined)

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission


(BM/TC Combined)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC communication links and signaling
links when the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack.

Subrack Communication Link

The subrack communication link is established between the GMPS and the GEPS.

A maximum of three subrack communication links can be configured between two subracks.

The communication between subracks is achieved through the GTNU in each subrack.
There are six external ports, numbered TDM0TDM5, on the panel of the GTNU. Each port
can be used by only one subrack communication link.

Semipermanent Link

The semipermanent link is established between the GMPS and the GEPS.

For a semipermanent link, at least one of the following pairs of numbers must be different:
The In-BSC subrack number and the Out-BSC subrack number
The In-BSC slot number and the Out-BSC slot number
The In-BSC port number and the Out-BSC port number

If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 16 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No. and Out-BSC
Timeslot No. should be set to 0, 2, 4, and 6.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 32 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No., and the Out-BSC
Timeslot No. should be set to 0 and 4.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 64 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No., and the Out-BSC
Timeslot No. should be set to 0.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 8 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No., and the Out-BSC
Timeslot No. can be set to any value.

The timeslots on semipermanent links can be multiplexed onto the 64 kbit/s timeslot on
one BSC port. The timeslots on semipermanent links and the monitoring timeslots can be
multiplexed onto the 64 kbit/s timeslot on one BSC port.

The specified BSC port timeslot for a semipermanent link must be NULL or FlexTS.

A maximum of 200 semipermanent links can be configured.

7-18

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

A Interface E1/T1

A Interface E1/T1

The CICs of the A Interface E1/T1 range from 0 to 65535. These CICs do not have to be
consecutive. You can manually change the number of the CIC.

The CIC (except for 65535) of each A Interface E1/T1 must be unique in a signaling point.

The CICs of the A Interface E1/T1 between the BSC and different MSCs can be duplicate.
For example, the CICs between the BSC and MSC 1, between the BSC and MSC 2, and
between the BSC and MGW 1 can be duplicate.

The CICs of the A Interface E1/T1 between the BSC and multiple MGWs (DPC groups) can
be duplicate. For example, the CICs between the BSC and MGW 1, and between the
BSC and MGW 2 can be duplicate.

If multiple E1s/T1s of the BSC are connected to one MGW, the CIC of each A Interface
E1/T1 must be unique.

SS7 Signaling Point

Each signaling point code must be unique.

The BSC can be configured with up to 4 OSPs, 32 STPs, and 32 DSPs.

The OSP, STP, and DSP must be unique.

The DPC in each DPC group must be unique.

68P02909W07-A

7-19

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

SS7 Signaling Link

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

SS7 Signaling Link

The SS7 signaling link supports two types of rates: 64 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s. The 2 Mbit/s
signaling link can be a 2.048 Mbit/s link or N x 64 kbit/s (1<N<32) links. One BSC
supports only one rate type.

Each SS7 signaling link can be configured with different bandwidths. The SS7 signaling
links are in load sharing mode. Therefore, Motorola recommends that all the SS7 signaling
links be configured with the same bandwidth. Each 2 Mbit/s signaling link can be the
combination of any timeslots (except for timeslot 0) on an E1.

One pair of signaling points can be configured with up to sixteen 64 kbit/s SS7 signaling
links. In configuration, to balance the load, the recommended number of SS7 signaling
links is 2 to the power of N, that is, 2, 4, 8, or 16.

One signaling point must be configured with at least two 2 Mbit/s signaling links, and it
is recommended that the two signaling links are configured on different E1/T1 cables or
different STM-1 cables.

If the GTCS maps one DSP, each GMPS/GEPS can be configured with a maximum of sixteen
64 kbit/s SS7 signaling links; if the GTCS maps multiple DSPs, each GMPS/GEPS can be
configured with a maximum of thirty-two 64 kbit/s SS7 signaling links.

Each GMPS/GEPS can be configured with up to eight 2 kbit/s SS7 signaling links.

In E1 transmission mode, the total bandwidth of SS7 signaling links cannot exceed 4
Mbit/s. In T1 transmission mode, the total bandwidth of SS7 signaling links cannot exceed
3 Mbit/s. In E1 transmission mode, if each signaling link of 64 kbit/s has 16 timeslots, the
total bandwidth amounts to 1 Mbit/s. A maximum of three signaling links of 64 kbit/s can
be configured because the total bandwidth cannot exceed 4 Mbit/s.

Gb Interface Link
For details on the configuration principles of Gb interface links, refer to Configuration Principles
of the Gb Interface Links on page 7-31.

7-20

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (BM/TC Combined)

Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (BM/TC


Combined)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC clock when the BM and TC
are configured in the same subrack.

GMPS/GEPS Clock
The GGCU in the GMPS traces the upper-level clock, and then provides clock signals for the
GMPS and the GEPS.
The reference clock for the GGCU is of two types: BITS clock and line clock. The BITS clock is
more accurate and more reliable. Therefore, the BITS clock is preferred.

Configuration principles of BSC clock


Table 7-6 lists the configuration principles of BSC clock.

Table 7-6

Configuration principles of BSC clock

Clock

Configuration Principles

Line clock

If the GEIUA is configured, two line clock signals, line 0 and line 1, can
be configured. If the GOIUA is configured, only one line clock signal can
be configured and the line clock signal must be configured on port 0
on the GOIUA.

8K reference
clock

If the configured line clock signals are selected for the 8K reference
clock, do not delete any line clock.

System clock

The configuration principles of the clock source priority are as follows:

The BSC provides up to four clock source priorities: priority 1 to


priority 4, from the highest to the lowest.

The clock source and the clock source priority have a one-to-one
mapping.

By default, the priority of the BITS clock is higher than that of the
line clock. Modify the priority of the clock source to set the priority
of the line clock higher than that of the BITS clock.

Switchover strategy of the current clock source: The BSC requires only
one clock source when running. Select a handover strategy to switch the
faulty clock source to a normal clock source. The clock source has three
working modes: AUTO, MANUAL, and FREE.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

7-21

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration principles of BSC clock

Table 7-6

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Configuration principles of BSC clock (Continued)

Clock

Configuration Principles

In AUTO mode, do not specify a clock source as the current clock


source. The BSC automatically selects a clock source with the
highest priority. For example, if the current clock source of priority
3 is faulty, the BSC selects the clock source of priority 4. After the
faulty clock source recovers, the BSC switches the clock source to
priority 3. If all the clock sources are faulty, the BSC switches to the
free-run mode. When the clock sources recover, the BSC switches
to the FREE mode.

In MANUAL mode, a clock source is specified as the current clock


source. The BSC cannot use another clock source even if this clock
source fails.

The FREE mode is the default clock working mode of the BSC.

7-22

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

Configuration Principles of the BSC Devices (IP


Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC cabinets, subracks, and boards
when the A Interface uses the IP transmission mode.

Cabinet
The configuration principles of BSC cabinets are as follows:

Only one GBCR cabinet can be configured on the BSC side.

The GEPS and GMPS can be configured in the cabinet.

Each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box and a management subrack
for the power distribution box.

Subrack
The configuration principles of BSC subracks are as follows:

The GMPS is mandatory in the BSC. Each BSC must be configured with one GMPS and
zero to two GEPSs.

By default, a GMPS is configured in cabinet 0. The newly added subracks must be


configured from bottom up.

The GMPS and GEPS, including the boards in these subracks, must be configured in order.

Each BSC must be configured with at least one GMPS.

Each subrack is configured with a fan box. The fan box is added automatically when
you add a subrack.

Two GGCUs (in active/standby mode), two GTNUs (in active/standby mode), two GSCUs
(in active/standby mode), and two GOMUs (in active/standby mode) are displayed in the
GMPS by default on the LMT. By default, two GTNUs (in active/standby mode) and two
GSCUs (in active/standby mode) are displayed in the GEPS on the LMT. These boards can
be deleted only when you delete the subracks where these boards are located.

68P02909W07-A

7-23

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Board

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Board
The configuration principles of BSC boards are as follows:

The A Interface, Abis interface, and Gb interface support the E1/T1 and STM-1
transmission modes. The A Interface also supports the GE/FE transmission mode. The
E1/T1 transmission mode and STM-1 transmission mode can coexist in one subrack. To
facilitate configuration and maintenance, Motorola recommends that one interface use one
type of interface boards. Do not configure two types of interface boards together.

To ensure the system reliability, Motorola recommends that all the boards, except for the
GDPUX/GDPUP, be configured in active/standby mode.

The GOIUA and GOIUB support the APS function. If the GOIUB and GOIUA are in
active/standby mode, the APS function is selected by default.

The GGCU, GSCU, GTNU, and GOMU are displayed by default on the LMT. Table 7-7 lists the
configuration principles of the boards except for those displayed by default on the LMT.

Table 7-7

Configuration principles of BSC boards

Board

Configuration Principles

GDPUX

The GDPUX is configured in the GMPS.

The resource pool mode is used.

GOGUA/GFGUA

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. When the A interface uses the IP


transmission mode, the GFGUA is configured to achieve the FE or GE
auto-sensing on the A interface.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. When the A interface uses the IP


transmission mode, the GOGUA is configured to achieve the GE
transmission on the A interface.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

Configured in the GMPS and GEPS. The numbers of boards to be


configured depend on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GEIUB and the GOIUB can be configured in one subrack if required.

GEIUB/GOIUB

Continued

7-24

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Table 7-7

Board

Configuration principles of BSC boards (Continued)

Board

Configuration Principles

GFGUG/GEPUG

The GFGUG/GEPUG is configured in the GMPS/GEPS when the BSC is


configured with the built-in PCU.

When the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode, the GEPUG is


configured; when the Gb interface uses the IP transmission mode, the
GFGUG is configured.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

The GDPUP is configured when the BSC is configured with the built-in
PCU.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS.

The resource pool mode is used.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

Configured in the GMPS/GEPS. The number of boards to be configured


depends on the system specifications.

These boards support the independent mode and the active/standby


mode. The active/standby mode is recommended.

GDPUP

GXPUM

GXPUT

NOTE
On the BSC Local Manager, the types of boards that can be configured depend on
the type of the subrack that holds the boards and the serial numbers of slots in the
subrack. Table 7-7 provides the recommended configurations of the boards. Modify
the configurations according to actual requirements.

68P02909W07-A

7-25

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Chapter 7:

Configuration Principles of the BSC Transmission (IP


Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC communication links and signaling
links when the BM and TC are configured in the same subrack.

Subrack Communication Link

The subrack communication link is established between the GMPS and the GEPS.

A maximum of three subrack communication links can be configured between two subracks.

The communication between subracks is achieved through the GTNU in each subrack.
There are six external ports, numbered TDM0TDM5, on the panel of the GTNU. Only one
subrack communication link uses each port .

Semipermanent Link

The semipermanent link is established between the GMPS and the GEPS.

For a semipermanent link, at least one of the following pairs of numbers must be different:
The In-BSC subrack number and the Out-BSC subrack number
The In-BSC slot number and the Out-BSC slot number
The In-BSC port number and the Out-BSC port number

If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 16 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No. and Out-BSC
Timeslot No. should be set to 0, 2, 4, and 6.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 32 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No., and the Out-BSC
Timeslot No. should be set to 0 and 4.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 64 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No., and the Out-BSC
Timeslot No. should be set to 0.
If the data rate of a semipermanent link is 8 kbit/s, In-BSC Timeslot No., and the Out-BSC
Timeslot No. can be set to any value.

The timeslots on semipermanent links can be multiplexed onto the 64 kbit/s timeslot on
one BSC port. The timeslots on semipermanent links and the monitoring timeslots can be
multiplexed onto the 64 kbit/s timeslot on one BSC port.

The specified BSC port timeslot for a semipermanent link must be NULL, CIC, or FlexTS.

A maximum of 200 semipermanent links can be configured.

7-26

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Gb Interface Link

Gb Interface Link
For details on the configuration principles of Gb interface links, refer to Configuration Principles
of the Gb Interface Links on page 7-31.

68P02909W07-A

7-27

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (IP Transmission Mode on the A Interface)
Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Chapter 7:

Configuration Principles of the BSC Clock (IP


Transmission Mode on the A Interface)

This section describes the configuration principles of the BSC clock when the A Interface uses
the IP transmission mode.

GMPS/GEPS Clock
The GGCU in the GMPS traces the upper-level clock, and then provides clock signals for the
GMPS and the GEPS.
The reference clock for the GGCU is the BITS clock

Configuration principles of BSC clock


Table 7-8 lists the configuration principles of BSC clock.

Table 7-8

Configuration principles of BSC clock

Clock

Configuration Principles

8K reference
clock

When the A interface uses the IP transmission mode, the clock source for
the BSC cannot be the line clock.

System clock

The configuration principles of the clock source priority are as follows:

The BSC provides up to two clock source priorities: priority 1 and


priority 2. Priority 1 is higher than priority 2.

The clock source and the clock source priority have a one-to-one
mapping.

Switchover strategy of the current clock source: The BSC requires only
one clock source when running. Select a handover strategy to switch the
faulty clock source to a normal clock source. The clock source has three
working modes: AUTO, MANUAL, and FREE.

In AUTO mode, do not specify a clock source as the current clock


source. The BSC automatically selects a clock source with the
highest priority. For example, if the current clock source of priority
3 is faulty, the BSC selects the clock source of priority 4. After the
faulty clock source recovers, the BSC switches the clock source to
priority 3. If all the clock sources are faulty, the BSC switches to the
free-run mode. When the clock sources recover, the BSC switches
to the FREE mode.

In MANUAL mode, a clock source is specified as the current clock


source. The BSC cannot use another clock source even if this clock
source fails.

The FREE mode is the default clock working mode of the BSC.

7-28

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the Built-in PCU Devices

Configuration Principles of the Built-in PCU Devices

This section describes the configuration principles of the built-in PCU devices. When the built-in
PCU is used, the BSC must be configured with the related boards to handle the PS services, and
the configuration must follow the related principles.

Configuration Principles of Devices


The BSC should be configured with the GDPUP to handle the PS services and configured with
the GEPUG/GFGUG to provide the Gb interface. To determine the numbers of boards and Gb
interface links, obtain the following information:

Total number of PDCHs

Data transmission rate on the Um interface

The data transmission rate on the Um interface varies with the coding scheme. See Table 7-9.

Table 7-9

Coding scheme and transmission rate

Coding Scheme

Transmission Rate (kbit/s)

CS-1

9.05

CS-2

13.4

CS-3

15.6

CS-4

21.4

MCS-1

8.8

MCS-2

11.2

MCS-3

14.8

MCS-4

17.6

MCS-5

22.4

MCS-6

29.6

MCS-7

44.8

MCS-8

54.4

MCS-9

59.2

68P02909W07-A

7-29

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of Devices

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

The configuration principles of the GDPUP/GEPUG/GFGUG are as follows:

Each GDPUP can handle the services on 1024 PDCHs (including static and dynamic packet
channels). One redundant GDPUP is configured to improve the system reliability.

Each pair of GEPUPs/GFGUGs can handle the services on eight GDPUPs. One BSC is
usually configured with one pair of Gb interface boards. If more than one pair of Gb
interface boards is required, configure them uniformly in subracks.

Each pair of GEPUGs provides 32 E1 links, which support the traffic flow of 64 Mbit/s.

Each pair of GFGUGs provides eight FE ports or two GE ports, which support the traffic
flow of 128 Mbit/s.

The number of E1 links to be configured on the Gb interface depends on the factors such
as the number of PDCHs.

7-30

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the Gb Interface Links

Configuration Principles of the Gb Interface Links

The Gb interface can use the FR protocol or the IP protocol. For different protocols, the
configuration objects and configuration principles of the Gb interface links are different.
When the Gb interface uses the FR protocol, the configuration of Gb interface links involves the
NSE, BC, NSVC, and PTPBVC. When the Gb interface uses the IP protocol, the configuration of
Gb interface links involves the NSE, BC, NSVC, and PTPBVC. Table 7-10 lists these objects.

Table 7-10

Parameters of the Gb interface links

Object

Description

Bearer Channel (BC)

BC is the bearer channel for the frame relay. It is an E1/T1


timeslot group used to transfer data and signaling on the Gb
interface. Bandwidth = number of timeslots x 64 kbit/s. One
or several BCs can be configured on one E1. Each BC on an
E1 is assigned a number to facilitate local management. This
number is called BC ID. For an E1, the BC ID on the local end
and the BC ID on the peer end can be different, but the timeslot
distribution on both ends must be consistent.

Network Service Virtual


Connection (NSVC)

NSVC is the virtual connection between the BSC and the SGSN.
The NSVC on the BSC side and the NSVC on the SGSN side have
a one-to-one relationship. Their NSVCIs are the same. The NS
divides the NSVC into different groups. Each group is identified
by an NSEI. The NSVCs in the same group use the loading
sharing mode. If an NSVC is unavailable, the NS switches the
data from this NSVC to another NSVC for transmission. One
NSVC group is connected to one SGSN. In FR transmission
mode, one NSVC corresponds to one PVC. In IP transmission
mode, one NSVC is identified by the local IP address, local port,
peer IP address, and peer port.

Permanent Virtual
Connection (PVC)

PVC is the permanent virtual connection for the frame relay.


It is a logical transmission channel. Multiple PVCs can be
established on one BC. The PVCs are identified by Data Link
Control Identifiers (DLCIs). The DLCI on the BSC side and that
on the SGSN must be the same. The PVC is established with
the NSVC.

NSE

The NSE is represented by a BVC set on the BSSGP layer and a


NSVC set on the NS layer. The NSE is identified by the NSEI.
The NSEI on the BSC side and that on the SGSN side must be
consistent. The FR protocol or the IP protocol is selected for one
NSE. If the FR protocol is selected, the BC and NSVC should be
configured. If the IP protocol is selected, the local and remote
NSVLs should be configured.
Continued

68P02909W07-A

7-31

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of the Gb Interface Links

Table 7-10

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Parameters of the Gb interface links (Continued)


Description

Object
Local NSVL and remote
NSVL

The local NSVL determines the position information of the


GFGUG, establishes the relations between the NSE and the
DevIP/port number, and determines the ports where the data of
cells in the NSE is transferred. The remote NSVL establishes
the relations between the DevIP and port number on the NSE
side and on the SGSN side, and determines the ports where the
data of cells in the NSE is transferred.

Point To Point BSSGP


Virtual Connection (PTP
BVC)

PTP BVC is the point-to-point virtual connection on the BSSGP


layer.

Figure 7-3 shows the connections of the configuration objects between the BSC and the SGSN.

Figure 7-3

Connections of configuration objects

7-32

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the Gb Interface Links

The configuration principles of the Gb interface links are as follows:

One BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs.

One BSC can be configured with multiple NSEs.

One SGSN can correspond to multiple NSEs in one BSC, but all the NSVCs and PTPBVCs
in one NSE serve only one SGSN. If the FR protocol is selected, the NSVC ID on the BSC
side and that on the SGSN side must be the same.

The NSVC serves the NSE in the same subrack. All the NSVCs in one NSE must be
configured in the same subrack.

One cell corresponds to one PTP BVC.

One BSC can be configured with the cells in different SGSNs.

The cells in one routing area (RA) must belong to the same NSE, that is, the cells in one RA
must belong to the same BSC and SGSN.

In the case of direct point-to-point connections between the BSC and the SGSN, Motorola
recommends that multiple timeslots on the E1 be bound to form a BC.

Multiple NSVCs can be configured on one BC. Motorola recommends that a maximum of
two NSVCs on one BC serve one NSE and that the NSVCs be uniformly distributed.

68P02909W07-A

7-33

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

External Cells and Neighbor Cells

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

External Cells and Neighbor Cells

This section describes the definitions and configuration principles of external cells and neighbor
cells.

External Cells
External cells are not controlled by the local BSC. External cells can be 2G external cells or 3G
external cells. 2G external cells are the GSM/GPRS cells. 3G external cells are the WCDMA cells.

Neighbor Cells
Neighbor cells are adjacent to the serving cell. Neighbor cells can be the local BSC cells, 2G
external cells, or 3G external cells. The configuration principles of neighbor cells are as follows:

One cell can be configured with up to thirty-two 2G neighbor cells and thirty-two 3G
neighbor cells.

Any two 2G external neighbor cells of a cell should not have the same main BCCH
frequencies or the same BSIC.

Any two 3G external neighbor cells of a cell should not have the same frequencies,
scrambling code, or diversity indication.

The cell configured with the enhanced concentric cell function must be set to the neighbor
cell of itself. Therefore, the cell configured with the enhanced concentric cell function
(except for the cell itself) can be configured with up to sixty-three 2G neighbor cells and
sixty-three 3G neighbor cells.

7-34

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Configuration Principles of the FH Cell

Configuration Principles of the FH Cell

This section describes the configuration principles of the frequency hopping (FH) cell.
When configuring an FH cell, adhere to the following principles:

The GSM900 is classified into three sub frequency bands: P-GSM, E-GSM, and R-GSM.
The P-GSM (900P) band provides the frequencies numbered from 1 to 124, the E-GSM
(900E) band provides the frequencies 0 and those numbered from 975 to 1023, and the
R-GSM (900R) band provides the frequencies numbered from 955 to 974. The Motorala
BSC only supports the 900P and the 900E.

In initial configuration, the first channel to be configured is the main BCCH by default.
If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900P band, the 900P band is the compatible
frequency band while the 900E and 1800M bands are the incompatible frequency bands. If
the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900E band, the 900P and 900E bands are the
compatible frequency bands while the 1800M band is the incompatible frequency bands. If
the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900P band, the cells cannot have the frequencies
from the incompatible EGSM or 1800M band.

The TRX that carries the SDCCH should not operate on the frequency band higher than
the frequency band on which the TRX carrying the main BCCH operates. The PDCH must
be configured on the TRX whose frequency belongs to the frequency bands that are
compatible with the frequency band that provides the main BCCH.

If a cell is configured with less than two TRXs, the cell cannot be configured as an FH cell.

In a double-timeslot cell, the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be configured in the
underlaid subcell.

In a double-timeslot and concentric cell, a minimum of one static PDCH must be configured
in the overlaid subcell.

In a double-timeslot cell, the odd-numbered channels on the TRXs in the underlaid subcell
must be SDCCHs.

If a double-timeslot cell is configured with baseband FH, the TRXs in the underlaid subcell
cannot be in the same FH group as other TRXs.

If a COBCCH cell is configured with FH, all the frequencies in an FH group must be on
the same frequency band.

The main BCCH, combined BCCH, BCCH+CBCH, and BCCH should not participate in FH.

If the baseband FH and the EDGE functionality conflict, the baseband FH and the EDGE
functionality cannot be configured simultaneously.

The Base station Color Code (BCC) of a cell must be the same as the Training Sequence
Code (TSC) in the FH data table.

In baseband FH, the FH group that contains the frequencies of the TRXs not carrying the
main BCCH on timeslot 0 cannot contain the main BCCH frequency.

68P02909W07-A

7-35

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Configuration Principles of the FH Cell

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

In RF FH, the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be set to No FH.

For the FH TRXs, the frequencies of the timeslots of the same number cannot belong to
the same FH group. If the FH group numbers are the same, the Mobile Allocation Index
Offsets (MAIOs) cannot be the same.

In a common cell, the number of frequencies in the compatible frequency bands of the main
BCCH for the GPRS cell must be smaller than or equal to 24; the number of frequencies in
the compatible frequency bands of the main BCCH for the EDGE cell must be smaller than
or equal to 16. The number of frequencies in the incompatible frequency bands of the main
BCCH is not restricted; however, the PDCH cannot be configured on the TRXs that operate
on the incompatible frequency bands of the main BCCH.

For a common cell, if the number of frequencies required in the compatible frequency
bands of the main BCCH for the GPRS cell is greater than 24 or if the number of
frequencies required in the compatible frequency bands of the main BCCH for the EDGE
cell is greater than 16, then the PDCH must be configured on only one of the TRXs that
operate on the compatible frequency bands of the main BCCH. Channel conversion is
allowed only on the channels on this TRX. Channel conversion is not allowed on the
channels on other TRXs that operate on the compatible frequency bands of the main BCCH;
that is, the maximum number of PDCHs on these TRXs is set to 0.

For a concentric cell, the number of frequencies of the TRX that carries the main BCCH in
the underlaid subcell and the channel configuration principles are the same as those of a
common cell; the number of frequencies of the TRX in the overlaid subcell and channel
configuration principles are not restricted.

In a common cell, only the TCH in the TRX that operates on the frequency bands
compatible with the frequency band that provides the main BCCH can be converted to the
PDCH. In a concentric cell, only the channel in the TRX that operates on the frequency
bands compatible with the frequency band that provides the main BCCH frequency in
the underlaid subcell can be converted to the PDCH. The TRXs that operate on the
frequency bands incompatible with the frequency band that provides the main BCCH
cannot be configured with the PDCH, and the TCHs in those TRXs cannot be converted to
PDCHs. The TRXs in the overlaid subcell can be configured with PDCHs and TCHs can
be converted to PDCHs.

If baseband FH is configured in a double-timeslot cell, the double-timeslot TRXs cannot be


in the same MA group as the single-timeslot TRXs; the double-timeslots on the same TRX
must be in the same MA group.

7-36

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

TRXs

TRXs

This section describes how to assign TRXs for a cell and how to assign frequencies for TRXs.
When configuring the attributes of TRXs in a cell, assign TRXs for the cell, and then assign
frequencies for TRXs, as shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4

Configuring TRX attributes

Available TRXs: TRXs that can be assigned to the cell. Each TRX maps a TRX board.

NOTE
Different types of BTSs are assigned different numbers of TRXs.

Assigned TRXs: TRXs that are assigned to the cell.

Frequencies: frequencies that can be assigned to the TRXs. For a non-FH cell, each TRX
is assigned one frequency to process services.

The BSC supports frequency bands GSM900, DSC1800, and GSM900 and DCS1800. Different
frequency bands are in different frequency ranges. Table 7-11 lists the mapping between the
frequency bands and the frequency ranges.

68P02909W07-A

7-37

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

TRXs

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Table 7-11

Mapping between the frequency bands and the frequency ranges

Freq. Band Type

Frequency Range

GSM900

0-124, 975-1023

DCS1800

512-885

GSM900&DCS1800

0-124, 512-885, 975-1023

The number of TRXs carried on each E1 port on the Abis interface board as follow:
When the BTS local switching and the Flex Abis mode are not used, each E1 port supports 13 to
15 TRXs. When all the TRXs on the E1 port of the Abis interface work in full-rate mode, each
E1 port carries 15 TRXs.
When all the TRXs on the E1 port of the Abis interface work in half-rate mode, each E1 port
carries 13 TRXs. When the BTS local switching and the Flex Abis mode are used, each E1 port
carries 13 to 18 TRXs. Each E1 port can carry up to 18 TRXs.

7-38

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Timeslots on the Abis Interface

Timeslots on the Abis Interface

This section describes the timeslot assignment on the Abis interface.

BTS Topology
This section describes the BTS topologies. The BSC provides flexible BTS topologies on the
Abis interface. These topologies are the star topology, chain topology, tree topology, and ring
topology.

Star Topology
Star topology refers to the topology in which the BTSs connect to the BSC directly. These BTSs
do not have lower-level BTSs. Star topology is a commonly used network topology.
Star topology features simple network structure, convenient capacity expansion, and high
reliability. If a BTS incurs a fault, other BTSs are not affected. Therefore, the star topology is
widely used. However, the transmission resources of the star topology cannot be fully used in
mini BTSs. In this case, the timeslot integration device can be used to optimize the transmission.
Figure 7-5 shows the star topology.

Figure 7-5

Star topology

In star topology, the Abis interface can use the TDM transmission mode. For details on the
relation between the transmission mode and the topology, refer to Transmission and Networking

on the Abis Interface

68P02909W07-A

7-39

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BTS Topology

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Chain Topology
In the belt-shaped areas (such as highways) where the traffic volume is low, it is a waste of
transmission resources to use the star topology. In this case, the chain topology can be used.
In the chain topology, a cascaded BTS processes the timeslots of itself and transparently
transmits the timeslots of the lower-level BTSs.
The accuracy of clock signals decreases when the cascades increase. Too many cascades
deteriorate the BTS performance. Therefore, do not use the chain topology with too many
cascades. The chain topology has some disadvantages, such as inconvenient capacity expansion
and low reliability. If the BTS in the middle of the chain incurs a fault, the lower-level BTSs are
affected. Figure 7-6 shows the chain topology.

Figure 7-6

Chain topology

In chain topology, the Abis interface can use the TDM or HDLC transmission mode. For details
on the relation between the transmission mode and the topology, refer to Transmission and

Networking on the Abis Interface.

Tree Topology
In the tree topology, the BTS directly connecting to the BSC is the parent BTS. All the children
BTSs connect to the parent BTS. The parent BTS exchanges timeslots with each child BTS. You
can control the timeslot exchange on the LMT.
The tree topology combines the features of star topology and chain topology. Its reliability is
lower than the star topology but higher than the chain topology. The structure of the tree
topology is complicated. Therefore, the capacity expansion and maintenance of the network is
difficult. Figure 7-7 shows the tree topology.

Figure 7-7

Tree topology

In tree topology, the Abis interface can use the TDM or HDLC transmission mode. For details
on the relation between the transmission mode and the topology, refer to Transmission and

Networking on the Abis Interface.

7-40

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface

Ring Topology
Ring topology is a special chain topology. All the BTSs connect with each other to form a normal
chain and the last-level BTS connects with the BSC to form a ring. If the communication of the
ring is broken at a point, the topology of the BTSs before the breakpoint remains the same. After
the breakpoint, the BTSs form a new chain connection in the reverse direction.
Therefore, two chains are formed and the BTSs can still offer services. This improves the
robustness of the system. Figure 7-8 shows the ring topology.

Figure 7-8

Ring topology

In ring topology, the Abis interface can use the TDM transmission mode. For details on the
relation between the transmission mode and the topology, refer to Transmission and Networking

on the Abis Interface.

Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface


This section provides the principles and algorithm of timeslot assignment on the Abis interface.

NOTE

The MoTo BTS supports three multiplexing modes: Fix Abis 16k, Fix Abis 64k,
and Flex Abis. The multiplexing ratio in Flex Abis multiplexing mode can be
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 5:1, or 6:1.

Statistic multiplexing means that n channels use one 64 kbit/s timeslot. Each
channel uses the 64 kbit/s bandwidth in a different time slice, that is, Time
Division Multiplexing (TDM). In statistic multiplexing mode, more than one
channel is multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s bandwidth.

68P02909W07-A

7-41

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Principles of Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface


The principles of timeslot assignment on the Abis interface are as follows:

The n:1 statistic multiplexing and physical 16 kbit/s multiplexing cannot coexist on one link.

The OMLs, RSLs, ESLs, idle timeslots, monitoring timeslots, and TCHs are assigned
based on sub-timeslots.

When using the n:1 64 kbit/s statistic multiplexing mode, adhere to the following principles:
The timeslots of different BTSs cannot be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Traffic channels and signaling channels cannot be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s
timeslot.
One 64 kbit/s timeslot must be used even if one signaling channel or traffic channel
is configured.
Monitoring timeslots cannot share the same 64 kbit/s timeslot with other timeslots,
except for the semipermanent connection.
In different E1s of cascaded BTSs, all the objects multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s
timeslot must stay in the same 64 kbit/s timeslot and the relative positions of their
corresponding sub-timeslot numbers must remain the same.
Idle timeslots and the timeslots on TRXs cannot use the same 64 kbit/s bandwidth
with the semipermanent connection.
The number of OMLs for the GEIUB/GOIUB cannot exceed 256.
The number of RSLs for the GEIUB/GOIUB cannot exceed 256.

When use the FIX Abis 64 kbit/s statistic multiplexing mode, adhere to the following
principles:
The idle timeslots and the TCHs cannot be multiplexed. The TCHs carried on different
TRXs cannot be multiplexed onto the same 64 kbit/s channel, and one TRX can occupy
up to two 64 kbit/s channels.
The two RSLs corresponding to the two logical TRXs on the double-transceiver TRX
board must be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s channel.

When BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, or monitoring timeslots are added, timeslots on the
Abis interface must be assigned. The resources on the Abis interface should be assigned to
the following objects: OMLs, RSLs, channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots.

7-42

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Timeslot Arrangement on the Abis Interface

Algorithm of Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface


The algorithm of timeslot assignment on the Abis interface is as follows:

Each E1 port of the BTS manages sub-timeslots 0255. Sub-timeslots 07 are used for
synchronization. They cannot be assigned to any object.

The OML of a BTS is assigned on timeslot 31. In n:1 statistic multiplexing mode, the OML
is assigned on sub-timeslot 0 of timeslot 31. In physical 16 kbit/s multiplexing mode, the
OML is assigned on sub-timeslot 3 of timeslot 31.

Except for the incoming E1 timeslot, the E1 port directly connected to the BSC is selected
preferentially during the timeslot assignment of the upper-level BTS.

Monitoring timeslots and idle timeslots can be assigned only on the ports of the main
cabinets in the main cabinet groups.

Lower-level BTSs can be established only on the ports of the main cabinets in the main
cabinet groups.

Before the OML between the BTS and the BSC is established, the BTS scans different
timeslots and tries to establish the OML to the BSC. The number of BTS cascades is limited
to reduce the link setup time.

Timeslot Arrangement on the Abis Interface


During the operations involving timeslot assignment on the BSC Local Manager, if timeslot
assignment fails, the LMT prompts you to arrange timeslots. With your confirmation, the BSC
automatically arranges timeslots.
When performing operations involving timeslot assignment on the BSC Local Manager, you
are prompted to arrange timeslots, if the timeslot assignment fails.

Changing the BTS multiplexing mode

Adding a BTS

Adding a cell

Adding a TRX

Adding an idle timeslot

Adding a monitoring timeslot

Manually assigning Abis timeslots

Deleting a site chain

Moving a BTS

Blocking a timeslot

68P02909W07-A

7-43

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Timeslot Arrangement on the Abis Interface

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Assume that there are two cascaded BTSs. Level 1 BTS uses timeslots 4-59 and level 2 BTS uses
timeslots 68-127. Four idle timeslots of level 1 BTS are deleted and timeslots 6, 7, 8, and 9 are
released. A new TRX is added to level 2 BTS. The TRX carries six TCHs. Only two complete
64 kbit/s timeslots and two 32 kbit/s timeslots are available. The RSLs cannot be multiplexed
onto the TCHs and the timeslots of different BTSs cannot be multiplexed. Therefore, timeslot
resources are insufficient.
The LMT displays a dialog box, requesting you to decide whether to allow automatic timeslot
arrangement by the BSC.

If the existing timeslot distribution meets the requirements for BSC automatic
arrangement, the BSC starts to arrange timeslots.

If the existing timeslot distribution does not meet the requirements for BSC automatic
arrangement, add physical E1 links and add the corresponding site chains on the LMT.

Use the following methods to arrange timeslots to meet the requirement of the newly added
TRX for timeslots.

Arrange the timeslots of level 1 BTS. Move the services on timeslots 4 and 5 to timeslots 8
and 9. Therefore, an E1 contains three complete 64 kbit/s timeslots. There are sufficient
timeslot resources to add a TRX.

The RSL of the added TRX can use timeslots 4, 5, 6, and 7. The remaining two complete 64
kbit/s timeslots can be assigned to six TCHs.

Table 7-12 shows the timeslot distribution on the Abis interface before timeslot arrangement by
the BSC.

Table 7-12
by the BSC
Timeslot

Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface before timeslot arrangement


Sub-Timeslot

0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

...

...

...

...

...

12

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

13

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

14

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

15

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

16

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

17

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

...

...

...

...

...

30

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

31

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

7-44

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Timeslot Arrangement on the Abis Interface

Table 7-13 shows the timeslot distribution on the Abis interface after timeslot arrangement by
the BSC.

Table 7-13
the BSC
Timeslot

Timeslot distribution on the Abis interface after timeslot arrangement by


Sub-Timeslot

0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

...

...

...

...

...

12

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

13

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

Used by level 1 site

14

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

15

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

16

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

17

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

...

...

...

...

...

30

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

31

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

Used by level 2 site

The process of timeslot arrangement by the BSC is as follows:

The BSC releases all the timeslots that are used by the cascaded BTSs except for the
timeslots assigned manually.

The BSC reassigns timeslots for each object.

If the reassignment of timeslots fails, a timeslot arrangement failure message is displayed.

The manual assignment of Abis timeslots does not involve timeslot arrangement.

If the timeslot arrangement fails, the timeslot distribution before the timeslot arrangement
is restored.

68P02909W07-A

7-45

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BTS Multiplexing Mode

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

BTS Multiplexing Mode


This section describes the BTS multiplexing modes. The BTS multiplexing in the BSC refers to
the multiplexing of the LAPD signaling on the E1 timeslots of the Abis interface. The BSC offers
six 64 kbit/s statistic multiplexing modes (n:1, n <= 6). They are 1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 5:1, and 6:1.
In all the n:1 multiplexing modes, the speech rate is 16 kbit/s or 8 kbit/s (half rate). Four speech
channels (eight channels for half rate) occupy one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis interface. The
rate of all the signaling links is 64 kbit/s. In different multiplexing modes (n:1), n signaling
timeslots occupy one E1 timeslot (64 kbit/s) on the Abis interface. The 64 kbit/s exchange of all
the timeslots is performed on the GEIUB of the BSC.
One GEIUB of the BSC supports multiple BTS multiplexing modes. Because of the transparent
transmission relation between cascaded BTSs, one E1 supports multiple multiplexing modes, as
shown in Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9

Multiple BTS multiplexing modes

The four E1s are A0, A1, and A2, as shown in Figure 7-9. If the multiplexing modes of BTS 0,
BTS 1, and BTS 3 are 1:1, 2:1,and 4:1, then three multiplexing modes exist on the GEIUB. The
multiplexing mode of each E1 on the link where the BTS is located depends on the multiplexing
mode of the BTS itself.

Three multiplexing modes exist on A0. They are 1:1, 2:1,and 4:1.

Two multiplexing modes exist on A1. They are 2:1 and 4:1.

One multiplexing mode exists on A2. It is 4:1.

Examples of Timeslot Assignment in N:1 Multiplexing Mode


This provides the examples of E1 timeslot assignment in 1:1, 2:1, and 4:1 multiplexing modes.

7-46

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

BTS Multiplexing Mode

NOTE
The timeslot assignment of each multiplexing mode is based on the following
conditions:

The speech rate is 16 kbit/s. Four channels of speech occupy one 64 kbit/s
timeslot on the Abis interface.

For the first TRX, channel 0 (T00C0) is the BCCH and channel 1 (T00C1) is
the SDCCH.

If the BTS multiplexing mode is 5:1 or 6:1, each BTS must be configured with
one ESL.

If the BTS multiplexing mode is 5:1, the OML, ESL, and RSL multiplexing
mode is 1:1:3. If the BTS multiplexing mode is 6:1, the OML, ESL, and RSL
multiplexing mode is 1:1:4. The difference between multiplexing modes 5:1, 6:1,
and 4:1 lies in the multiplexing of RSLs. The BCCH and SDCCH use RSLs, that
is, the timeslots occupied by T00C0 and T00C1 are included in the timeslots
occupied by RSLs. Therefore, the 5:1 and 6:1 multiplexing modes are not listed
in the following tables.

1:1 Multiplexing Mode In the following example, BTS 0 is configured with a cell, the cell is
configured with four TRXs, the channels in the cell use default settings, and the multiplexing
mode is 1:1. Table 7-14 lists the timeslot assignment on the Abis interface.
Table 7-14
Timeslot
No

Timeslot assignment in 1:1 multiplexing mode


Sub-Timeslot No
0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

RSL00

T00C2

T00C3

T00C4

T00C5

T00C6

T00C7

T01C0

T01C1

RSL01

T01C2

T01C3

T01C4

T01C5

T01C6

T01C7

T02C0

T02C1

RSL02

T02C2

T02C3

T02C4

T02C5

T02C6

T02C7

T03C0

T03C1

10

RSL03

11

T03C2

T03C3

T03C4

T03C5

12

T03C6

T03C7

...
31

OML0

68P02909W07-A

7-47

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BTS Multiplexing Mode

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

2:1 Multiplexing Mode In the following example, BTS 0 is configured with a cell, the cell is
configured with four TRXs, the channels in the cell use default settings, and the multiplexing
mode is 2:1. Table 7-15 lists the timeslot assignment on the Abis interface.
Table 7-15
Timeslot
No.

Timeslot assignment in 2:1 multiplexing mode


Sub-Timeslot No.
0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

T00C2

T00C3

T00C4

T00C5

T00C6

T00C7

T01C0

T01C1

RSL01+RSL02

T01C2

T01C3

T01C4

T01C5

T01C6

T01C7

T02C0

T02C1

T02C2

T02C3

T02C4

T02C5

T02C6

T02C7

T03C0

T03C1

RSL03

T03C2

T03C3

T03C4

T03C5

10

T03C6

T03C7

11
...
31

OML0+RSL00

4:1 Multiplexing Mode In the following example, BTS 0 is configured with a cell, the cell is
configured with four TRXs, the channels in the cell use default settings, and the multiplexing
mode is 4:1. Table 7-16 lists the timeslot assignment on the Abis interface.
Table 7-16
Timeslot
No.

Timeslot assignment in 4:1 multiplexing mode


Sub-Timeslot No.

0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

T00C2

T00C3

T00C4

T00C5

T00C6

T00C7

T01C0

T01C1

T01C2

T01C3

T01C4

T01C5

T01C6

T01C7

T02C0

T02C1

T02C2

T02C3

T02C4

T02C5

T02C6

T02C7

T03C0

T03C1

RSL03

T03C2

T03C3

T03C4

T03C5

T03C6

T03C7
Continued

7-48

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Table 7-16

BTS Multiplexing Mode

Timeslot assignment in 4:1 multiplexing mode (Continued)

10
...
31

OML0+RSL00+RSL01+RSL02

Examples of Timeslot Assignment in Tree Topology


This section describes the timeslot assignment on the Abis interface in the tree topology.

NOTE
The timeslot assignment of each multiplexing mode is based on the following
conditions:

The speech rate is 16 kbit/s. Four channels of speech occupy one 64 kbit/s
timeslot on the Abis interface.

For the first TRX, channel 0 (T00C0) is the BCCH and channel 1 (T00C1) is
the SDCCH.

The BCCH and the SDCCH use the RSL, that is, the timeslots on the RSL contain
the timeslots on the T00C0 and T00C1. Therefore, T00C0 and T00C1 are not
listed in the following tables.

Figure 7-10 shows the tree topology.


The multiplexing modes of BTS 0, BTS 1, and BTS 3 are 1:1, 2:1, and 4:1. Each BTS is configured
with a cell, the cell is configured with two TRXs, and the channels in the cell use default settings.

Figure 7-10

BTSs in tree topology

BTS 0 is the root node. Table 7-17 to Table 7-19 show the timeslot assignment on E1s (A0A2) of
BTSs.

68P02909W07-A

7-49

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BTS Multiplexing Mode

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

Table 7-17
Timeslot No.

Timeslot assignment on A0
Sub-Timeslot No.
0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

RSL00

T00C2

T00C3

T00C4

T00C5

T00C6

T00C7

T01C0

T01C1

RSL01

T01C2

T01C3

T01C4

T01C5

T01C6

T01C7

OML1+RSL10

T10C2

T10C3

T10C4

T10C5

T10C6

T10C7

T11C0

T11C1

10

RSL11

11

T11C2

T11C3

T11C4

T11C5

12

T11C06

T11C7

13

OML2+RSL20+RSL21

14

T20C2

T20C3

T20C4

T20C5

15

T20C6

T20C7

T21C0

T21C1

16

T21C2

T21C3

T21C4

T21C5

17

T21C6

T21C7

18

OML3+ RSL30+RSL31

19

T30C2

T30C3

T30C4

T30C5

20

T30C6

T30C7

T31C0

T31C1

21

T31C2

T31C3

T31C4

T31C5

22

T31C6

T31C7

23
...
31

OML0

7-50

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Table 7-18

Manual Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface

Timeslot assignment on A1
Sub-Timeslot No.

Timeslot
No.

0, 1

2, 3

Synchronization

Synchronization Synchronization

Synchronization

T10C2

T10C3

T10C4

T10C5

T10C6

T10C7

T11C0

T11C1

RSL11

T11C2

T11C3

T11C4

T11C5

T11C6

T11C7

OML3+RSL30 + RSL31

T30C2

T30C3

T30C4

T30C5

T30C6

T30C7

T31C0

T31C1

T31C2

T31C3

T31C4

T31C5

T31C06

T31C7

10

4, 5

6, 7

11
...
31

OML1+ RSL10

Table 7-19
Timeslot No.

Timeslot assignment on A2
Sub-Timeslot No.
0, 1

2, 3

4, 5

6, 7

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

Synchronization

T30C2

T30C3

T30C4

T30C5

T30C6

T30C7

T31C0

T31C1

T31C2

T31C3

T31C4

T31C5

T31C6

T31C7

5
...
31

OML3+RSL30+RSL31

Manual Timeslot Assignment on the Abis Interface


This section describes the manual timeslot assignment on the Abis interface. Timeslot
assignment on the Abis interface is required when you add BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots,
and monitoring timeslots. By default, the timeslots are assigned automatically. You can also
manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface if required.

68P02909W07-A

7-51

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Semipermanent Connection

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

When manually assigning timeslots on the Abis interface, adhere to the following principles:

The objects that support manual timeslot assignment are OMLs, RSLs, channels, idle
timeslots, and monitoring timeslots.

You can assign timeslots on the Abis interface for multiple objects at a time.

If you manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface for a cascaded BTS, also manually
assign the incoming Abis timeslots for all the cascaded BTSs on the link.

The assigned timeslots must be idle or in Flex mode.

The multiplexing mode of assigned timeslots must be the same as the multiplexing mode
of the BTS. If the BTS uses the 2:1 multiplexing mode, do not multiplex four signaling
links together.

In the incoming E1 and outgoing E1 links of all the cascaded BTSs on a link, all the objects
multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot must be located in the same 64 kbit/s timeslot and
all the relative positions of sub-timeslots must remain unchanged. For example, three
objects of a BTS use timeslots 8, 9, and 10 of level-1 BTS and timeslots 4, 5, and 6 of level-2
BTS. When assigning timeslots for another object of the BTS, do not assign timeslot 11 of
level-1 BTS or timeslot 7 of level-2 BTS. You can assign a timeslot of level-1 BTS except for
timeslot 11 and a timeslot of level-2 BTS except for timeslot 7.

When adding BTSs, cells, TRXs, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots, you can manually
assign timeslots for only the newly added objects. The timeslots of existing objects cannot
be manually assigned. If you only manually assign timeslots on the Abis interface without
performing other operations, you can assign timeslots for all the objects on the entire link.

When you change the assignment mode of the timeslots of an object from manual mode to
auto mode, the timeslots are released and assigned automatically. When you change the
assignment mode of the timeslots of an object from auto mode to manual mode, the Abis
timeslots automatically assigned for the object are released.

You can manually assign the timeslots on the Abis interface for the BTSs on the same link
in a topology at a time.

Semipermanent Connection
Semipermanent connection refers to the transmission channel comprised of some idle timeslots
in the existing network. The semipermanent connection is used to transfer business hall
information, alarm information about the BTS AC power supply, and other maintenance
information.
When the network operator has to transmit some data from one terminal to another terminal and
the data does not have a high requirement for the transmission bandwidth, the idle transmission
resources in the GSM network can be specially used to transfer the data.
Semipermanent connection is a transparent channel that can be used to transfer information
specified by a subscriber. The BSC provides four types of semipermanent connections: 8 kbit/s,
16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, and 64 kbit/s.

7-52

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Principles of Idle Timeslot Assignment

There are two types of semipermanent links in the BSS system:

Semipermanent connectionConnection configured between interface boards

Monitoring timeslotConnection configured between the interface board and the BTS The
rates of monitoring timeslots are 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, and 64 kbit/s. You can assign
multiple monitoring timeslots for the BTSs on a link at a time.

Principles of Idle Timeslot Assignment


This section provides the principles of idle timeslot assignment. The idle timeslots carry the
GPRS services in the BSS.
The principles of idle timeslot assignment are as follows:

When you assign idle timeslots for a BTS, you can set the related attribute to manually
assign timeslots on the Abis interface for the newly added idle timeslots.

The idle timeslot configuration consists of addition and deletion of idle timeslots.

You can configure idle timeslots for the BTSs that are on only one link at a time.

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

7-53

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Principles of Idle Timeslot Assignment

Chapter 7: Reference to BSC Data Configuration

7-54

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

Chapter

8
Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial
Configuration Guide

68P02909W07-A
Aug 2008

8-1

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Chapter 8: Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial Configuration Guide

Appendix: Changes in BSC Initial Configuration Guide

This section describes the changes in the BSC Initial Configuration Guide.

01 (2008-07-21)
This is the initial commercial release.

8-2

68P02909W07-A

PRELIMINARY - UNDER DEVELOPMENT

Aug 2008

You might also like